Panasonic Camcorder AG HPX250EN User Manual

This product is eligible for the P2HD  
5 Year Warranty Repair Program.  
For details, see page 8 of Vol. 1.  
Operating Instructions  
Vol.2  
Memory Card Camera-Recorder  
AG-HPX250P  
AG-HPX250EN  
Model No.  
2
Volume  
Note that Operation Instructions Vol. 2 describes advanced  
operations of the Memory Card Camera-Recorder.  
For instructions on basic operations of the Memory Card  
Camera-Recorder, refer to Operating Instructions Vol. 1 (printed  
documents) contained in the supplied CD-ROM.  
Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and  
save this manual for future use.  
ENGLISH  
M0811HO0 -FJ  
VQT3T24A (E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Volume 1  
Read this first! (For AG-HPX250P)  
Read this first! (For AG-HPX250EN)  
Read this first! (For AG-HPX250P/  
AG-HPX250EN)  
Menu  
Using the setup menus  
Setup menu structure  
Outline of operations  
Reference  
Specifications  
Before use  
Operating precautions  
Precaution for use  
Accessories  
Optional units  
Description of parts  
Description of parts  
Preparation  
Charging the battery  
Power sources  
Adjusting the hand strap  
Attaching the shoulder strap  
Detaching and attaching the lens hood  
Detaching and attaching the lens cap  
Fitting the eye cup  
The remote control  
Turn on/off the camera-recorder  
Setting the calendar  
Charging the built-in battery  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents (continued)  
Shooting  
Volume 2  
Self-portrait shooting ....................................... 35  
Scan reverse shooting..................................... 35  
Zebra pattern................................................... 35  
Center marker display ..................................... 36  
Safety zone markers ....................................... 36  
Checking and displaying shooting status ........ 36  
Changing the image size................................. 37  
Optical Image Stabilizer .................................. 37  
DRS (Dynamic Range Stretcher) function....... 37  
FBC (Flash Band Compensation) ................... 38  
Using the USER buttons ................................. 39  
Backlight compensation .................................. 40  
Color bars........................................................ 40  
Waveform monitor function.............................. 40  
Adjusting the volume while shooting ............... 40  
Backup recording ............................................ 40  
2-slot continuous recording ............................. 41  
Shot mark function .......................................... 41  
Text memo recording....................................... 42  
Time stamp function ........................................ 42  
LAST CLIP DELETE function.......................... 42  
Using special recording modes....................... 43  
Pre-recording (PRE REC) ............................... 44  
Interval recording (INTERVAL REC)................ 44  
One-shot recording (ONE SHOT REC)........... 45  
Loop recording (LOOP REC)........................... 46  
One-clip recording (ONE CLIP REC) .............. 47  
Adjusting the shutter speed............................. 49  
Using SHTR/F.RATE dial................................. 49  
Setting SHUTTER mode ................................. 49  
Setting SYNCHRO SCAN mode ..................... 50  
Setting FRAME RATE mode ........................... 51  
Switching audio input ....................................... 52  
Using the built-in microphone.......................... 52  
Using another microphone and audio  
Viewfinder ............................................................ 6  
Using the viewfinder.......................................... 6  
Using the LCD monitor...................................... 7  
Emphasizing Image Outlines............................. 7  
Adjusting the screen display.............................. 8  
Changing backlight brightness .......................... 8  
Tally lamp ............................................................. 9  
Basic shooting operations ............................... 10  
Preparing to shoot........................................... 10  
Shooting in auto mode .................................... 10  
Checking photos taken (REC CHECK) ........... 12  
P2 card access lamps ..................................... 12  
Protecting against a possible erasure ............. 12  
Formatting P2 cards........................................ 13  
P2 card recording times .................................. 14  
Remove the P2 card........................................ 15  
Using SD/SDHC memory cards........................ 16  
Installing and removing the SD memory  
card ............................................................. 16  
Formatting SD memory card ........................... 16  
Cautions in using SD memory cards............... 17  
Using the zoom function................................... 18  
Digital zoom function....................................... 19  
Shooting in progressive mode......................... 20  
Standard recording  
(pull-down recording)................................... 20  
Native recording .............................................. 20  
Recording with Variable Frame Rate (VFR)..... 21  
Native VFR recording...................................... 21  
Standard VFR recording  
(pulldown recording).................................... 22  
Using progressive mode and VFR recording  
function........................................................ 23  
Flow effect shooting......................................... 27  
Shooting in manual mode................................. 28  
Switching to manual mode .............................. 28  
Manual focusing .............................................. 28  
Using focus assist function.............................. 29  
Iris adjustments ............................................... 30  
Adjusting the gain............................................ 30  
Using super gain ............................................. 31  
Light intensity adjustments.............................. 31  
Adjusting the white balance and black  
equipment.................................................... 53  
Adjusting the audio recording level  
automatically ............................................... 53  
Adjusting the recording level ........................... 54  
CH3 and CH4 recording levels........................ 55  
Audio level meter magnification ...................... 55  
Using scene files (Scene File Data)................. 56  
Changing scene file settings ........................... 56  
Saving scene files and other settings on SD  
memory cards.............................................. 58  
Configuration of setup data files...................... 60  
Using time data.................................................. 61  
Counter setting and display............................. 61  
Time data overview ......................................... 61  
Setting user bits............................................... 62  
balance........................................................... 32  
Adjusting the white balance............................. 32  
Adjusting the black balance............................. 34  
Shooting techniques for different targets....... 35  
Low-angle shooting ......................................... 35  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entering the user bits ...................................... 63  
Setting the time code....................................... 66  
Externally locking the time code...................... 67  
Outputting the time code externally................. 70  
Recording time codes and user bits................ 71  
Nonlinear editing with P2 card (PC mode: USB  
device).......................................................... 109  
Procedures for making connections to a  
personal computer..................................... 109  
Using a hard disk drive (PC mode: USB  
host).............................................................. 111  
Switching to the USB HOST mode................ 111  
Using the USB HOST mode.......................... 112  
Viewing hard disk drive information............... 112  
Formatting a hard disk drive.......................... 114  
Writing data on a hard disk drive................... 115  
Writing data back to P2 cards........................ 116  
Direction for using a hard disk drive.............. 117  
Warning and error display for thumbnail  
Playback  
Basic playback operations............................... 74  
Thumbnail operations....................................... 75  
Thumbnail manipulations overview ................. 76  
Thumbnail screen............................................ 77  
Selecting thumbnails ....................................... 79  
Playing back clips............................................ 79  
Switching the thumbnail display ...................... 80  
Changing thumbnails....................................... 81  
Shot mark........................................................ 82  
Text memo....................................................... 82  
Deleting clips................................................... 84  
Restoring clips................................................. 85  
Reconnection of incomplete clips.................... 85  
Copying clips................................................... 86  
Setting of clip meta data.................................. 87  
Formatting a P2 card....................................... 91  
Formatting SD memory cards ......................... 92  
Setting the thumbnail display mode ................ 92  
Properties........................................................ 93  
Useful playback functions................................ 99  
Variable speed search..................................... 99  
Slow playback ................................................. 99  
Fast forward/rewind playback.......................... 99  
Frame-by-frame playback ............................... 99  
Clip skip......................................................... 100  
Adjusting the volume..................................... 100  
Viewing images on a TV/monitor................... 100  
Checking the date and time........................... 100  
operation and USB HOST MODE ............. 117  
Displays  
Screen displays............................................... 120  
Viewfinder screen status displays ................. 120  
Screen displays............................................. 121  
Center information display............................. 125  
MODE CHECK indication.............................. 131  
Menu  
Setup menu list................................................ 132  
SCENE FILE screen...................................... 132  
SYSTEM SETUP screen............................... 135  
SW MODE screen......................................... 138  
AUTO SW screen.......................................... 140  
RECORDING SETUP screen........................ 141  
AUDIO SETUP screen .................................. 143  
OUTPUT SEL screen .................................... 145  
DISPLAY SETUP screen............................... 147  
CARD FUNCTIONS screen .......................... 150  
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen........................ 151  
DIAGNOSTIC screen .................................... 153  
OPTION MENU screen ................................. 154  
Editing  
Connecting external units .............................. 101  
Headphones.................................................. 101  
External microphone ..................................... 101  
Personal computer (non-linear editing/file  
transfer)..................................................... 102  
Hard disk drive (data copying)....................... 102  
Digital video equipment (Dubbing) ................ 103  
TV/Monitor (playback/dubbing) ..................... 104  
Connections to the DVCPRO/DV  
connector..................................................... 105  
Recording signals input to the DVCPRO/DV  
connector................................................... 105  
Control of external devices through 1394  
Reference  
Before calling for service................................ 155  
Updating the firmware incorporated into the  
unit................................................................ 158  
Cleaning ........................................................... 159  
Storage precautions........................................ 160  
How to handle data recorded on P2 cards.... 161  
Checkpoints for using memory cards........... 162  
Information on software for this product...... 163  
Recording format list ...................................... 164  
Index................................................................. 165  
connection................................................. 106  
Precautions in 1394 connections .................. 107  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewfinder  
This camera has two viewfinders; one is a  
miniature LCD in the viewfinder and the other is a  
retractable 3.45-type LCD.  
Use the viewfinder that best suits the application  
and shooting conditions.  
• The brightness and hue may differ between the  
images appearing on the viewfinder and LCD  
monitor and those displayed on a TV monitor.  
To see how the final images will appear, check  
them on a TV monitor.  
• The pixels of the LCD monitor are controlled  
to obtain high precision with 99.99 % of the  
effective pixels. This leaves less than 0.01 %  
of pixels that may not light or may remain on  
all the time. These phenomena are normal and  
will have no effect on the images you shoot.  
• Screen burn-in may occur in the LCD monitor.  
However, this is not a defect.  
• The following are all viewfinder phenomena,  
and are not faults. Furthermore, they have  
no effect on recording with this camera or on  
output signals.  
When the LCD monitor is open, the viewfinder  
may not display anything. Close the LCD  
monitor.  
· Primary colors (green, blue, red) may be  
seen in cases such as moving your line of  
sight within the viewfinder.  
Using the viewfinder  
· At low temperatures, the screen may appear  
with a pink tint.  
· When power is not supplied to the camera  
black lines may appear on the screen. These  
disappear when power is supplied.  
1
Set the POWER/MODE switch to ON and  
check that images appear in the viewfinder.  
• Image persistence may increase at low  
temperatures. This is not a fault.  
• When the camera recorder is very cold, the  
LCD monitor is darker than normal immediately  
after switching the power ON. As the internal  
temperature increases it returns to normal.  
2
3
Adjust the viewfinder’s angle so that the  
screen is positioned where it is easiest to  
see.  
You can move the view finder out to about  
90 degrees perpendicular to the camera-  
recorder.  
Adjust the Viewfinder diopter dial so that you  
can see the characters on the viewfinder  
screen clearly.  
Viewfinder diopter dial  
Eye piece  
Do not point the eye piece at the sun or other  
strong light source.  
• Light concentrated by the lens could damage  
internal components and poses a fire hazard.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the LCD monitor  
Emphasizing Image Outlines  
Emphasizing outlines of images in the viewfinder  
and on the LCD monitor makes it easier to focus.  
This function does not affect video output from the  
camera-recorder or video recorded by the camera-  
recorder.  
1
Set the POWER/MODE switch to ON.  
(Page 25 of Vol. 1)  
2
Open the LCD monitor.  
• It can open out to 90 degrees. Do not try  
to open it further as this will damage the  
camera-recorder.  
Adjust EVF PEAK LEVEL and EVF PEAK FREQ  
in the DISPLAY SETUP screen.  
DISPLAY SETUP  
EVF PEAK LEVEL  
EVF PEAK FREQ  
EVF SETTING  
EVF B. LIGHT  
EVF COLOR  
0
LOW  
>>>  
NORMAL  
ON  
EVF MODE  
AUTO  
100%  
85%  
ZEBRA1 DETECT  
ZEBRA2 DETECT  
PUSH MENU TO RETURN  
3
Position the LCD monitor where it is easiest  
to see.  
• The monitor can be rotated 180 degrees  
toward the lens and 90 degrees toward you.  
Do not apply unnecessary force to the  
open LCD. This can damage the camera-  
recorder.  
• Ensure the LCD is fully closed.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewfinder (continued)  
Adjusting the screen display  
You can return the settings for EVF SETTING  
and LCD SETTING to the factory settings by  
selecting the item and pressing COUNTER  
RESET (if it is possible to change the item at  
that time).  
• The viewfinder display can be in color or black  
and white. (See the setup menus, DISPLAY  
SETUP screen, EVF COLOR.) The resolution  
is the same for both of them.  
1
2
Set the POWER/MODE switch to ON.  
(Page 25 of Vol. 1)  
Press the MENU button.  
• For details on menu operation, refer to “Using  
the setup menus” (Page 28 of Vol. 1).  
You can also use the corresponding buttons  
on the remote control. For details, see  
“Description of parts” (Remote control).  
(Page 19 of Vol. 1)  
Changing backlight brightness  
The brightness of the LCD monitor backlight can  
be adjusted between five different settings.  
3
Viewfinder adjustments  
Select CHANGE under EVF SETTING on the  
setting menu DISPLAY SETUP screen.  
1
2
Select LCD BACKLIGHT from the setup  
menu DISPLAY SETUP screen.  
LCD monitor adjustments  
Set CHANGE under LCD SETTING on the  
setting menu DISPLAY SETUP screen.  
Select and set a value in the range of +1 to  
–3.  
When adjusting the viewfinder  
The greater the value the brighter the screen.  
DISPLAY SETUP  
EVF PEAK LEVEL  
EVF PEAK FREQ  
EVF SETTING  
EVF B. LIGHT  
EVF COLOR  
0
LOW  
>>>  
This setting will remain saved even if the  
camera-recorder’s power is switched off.  
You can cycle through LCD BACKLIGHT  
values and switch backlight brightness by  
pressing a USER button to which “LCD B.L”  
has been assigned.  
NORMAL  
ON  
EVF MODE  
AUTO  
100%  
85%  
ZEBRA1 DETECT  
ZEBRA2 DETECT  
PUSH MENU TO RETURN  
4
5
6
Push the Operation lever in the or   
direction to select the item.  
“Using the USER buttons” (Page 39)  
When adjusting the viewfinder  
EVF SETTING  
EVF BRIGHTNESS  
[–] ––––––––+–––––––– [+]  
EVF CONTRAST  
[–] ––––––––+–––––––– [+]  
PUSH MENU TO RETURN  
Push the Operation lever in the or   
direction to make adjustment.  
When adjusting the viewfinder  
EVF SETTING  
EVF BRIGHTNESS  
[–] ––––––––+–––––––– [+]  
EVF CONTRAST  
[–] ––––––––+–––––––– [+]  
PUSH MENU TO RETURN  
Press MENU three times to exit the menus.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tally lamp  
The tally lamp can be illuminated during recording  
by setting the TALLY LAMP item on the OTHER  
FUNCTIONS screen (Page 151) to any setting other  
than OFF.  
When the camera-recorder is in any of the following  
states, the tally lamp blinks.  
• When the remaining battery capacity runs out  
(4 blinks/sec.)  
Tally lamp  
(Rear)  
• When the available recording space on the P2  
card or the battery power is low (1 blink/sec.)  
• When removing the P2 card during access  
(4 blinks/sec.)  
• When there is no recording space left on the P2  
card (4 blinks/sec.)  
• When there is a warning for GENLOCK IN  
terminal signal distortion, system error, or a  
recording defect. (4 blinks/sec.)  
Tally lamp  
(Front)  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic shooting operations  
Preparing to shoot  
Shooting in auto mode  
1
2
Set the POWER/MODE switch to ON.  
(Page 25 of Vol. 1)  
1
Set the POWER/MODE switch to ON.  
(Page 25 of Vol. 1)  
• Check that the mode lamp (CAMERA) is  
lighted red.  
Push the OPEN lever of the P2 card slot  
cover downward () and slide to open ().  
2
3
Switch the AUTO/MANUAL switch to AUTO  
to select auto mode.  
3
4
Insert the P2 card securely in the card slot.  
A
• “  
” appears on the viewfinder and LCD  
Raise the P2 card eject button to the  
direction of the arrow, and close the P2  
card/SD memory card slot cover.  
• There are two card slots.  
• Be absolutely sure to close the card slot  
covers to keep the dust out.  
screens.  
• The focus, gain, iris and white balance are  
adjusted automatically.  
Press the START/STOP button (Red) on the  
POWER/MODE switch to start shooting.  
• Press again to return to the camera-recorder  
to the shooting standby mode.  
• Do not remove the P2 card while the P2 card  
access lamps are blinking orange. (Page 12)  
• Use the handle START/STOP button to make  
it easier to shoot from low angles.  
To prevent accidental operation, the handle  
side START/STOP button includes a hold  
mechanism.  
START/STOP  
button  
(handle side)  
1
4
3
POWER/MODE  
switch  
Mode lamp  
(CAMERA)  
2
1
Lock release button  
AUTO/MANUAL  
switch  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
POWER/MODE  
switch  
Lock release button  
3
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Under the following circumstances, even if  
you press the START/STOP button it may  
take some time until the writing to the P2 card  
finishes. For this reason, the operation will not  
be acknowledged if you press the START/STOP  
button too soon.  
• Stopped after only a short recording time  
• Stopped immediately after the recording has  
moved to a second P2 card  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic shooting operations (continued)  
Checking photos taken (REC CHECK)  
P2 card access lamps  
Pressing the REC CHECK button after a recording  
will automatically play back the last two seconds of  
the most recent clip.  
Holding down the REC CHECK button will allow  
you to play back up to 10 seconds.  
CAMERA/PB/PC (USB HOST) mode  
Lights green:  
Data can be saved onto the cards or loaded from  
them.  
Blinks green (slow):  
Use this function to check that recording is  
performed normally.  
No available space on card, card is  
writeprotected.  
• The camera-recorder returns to recording  
standby mode after playback.  
• For clips with a playback time of 10 seconds or  
less, clips earlier than the current clip are not  
played back even if the REC CHECK button is  
held down after returning the clip to the start.  
Lights orange:  
Slot that is the object of recording.  
Blinks orange:  
Data is now being accessed.  
Blinks orange (fast):  
A card is now being recognized.  
Both lamps blink orange:  
Ejection of card during access.  
Off:  
REC CHECK button  
Cards have not been inserted or formatted.  
Insertion of incompatible card.  
PC (USB DEVICE) mode  
Blinks orange:  
Data is now being accessed.  
Off:  
A status other than access underway.  
Note that a backup recording performed on  
a backup device connected to the DVCPRO/  
DV or SDI OUT connector will also record  
video played back using the REC CHECK  
function.  
In one-clip recording mode, the beginning  
of a clip is not used as the start position for  
playback after returning as far as possible  
with the REC CHECK function or starting  
playback while recording is paused.  
Instead, playback starts from the start point  
of the most recent recording operation.  
P2 card access lamp  
Protecting against a possible erasure  
Switch the write-protect switch of the P2 card to  
[PROTECT].  
Write-protect switch  
PROTECT  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Formatting P2 cards  
4
On the thumbnails menu, select  
OPERATION and then FORMAT. (Page 91)  
• A screen such as the one shown below  
appears. Select the number of the slot  
into which you inserted the P2 card to  
be formatted. Select EXIT to cancel the  
formatting.  
1
Set the POWER/MODE switch to ON.  
(Page 25 of Vol. 1)  
2
Turn the POWER/MODE switch to set to PB/  
THUMBNAIL mode (PB/THUMBNAIL lamp  
illuminates).  
• When you press the MENU button, the  
thumbnails menu display disappears.  
• Thumbnails are displayed.  
Mode lamp (PB/THUMBNAIL)  
THUMBNAIL  
DELETE  
OPERATION  
FORMAT  
PROPERTY  
META DATA  
HDD  
SLOT1  
SLOT2  
REPAIR CLIP  
RE-CONNECTI
SD CARD  
EXIT  
COPY  
EXIT  
EXCH.THUMBN
EXIT  
POWER/MODE switch  
5
Select YES on the confirmation screen.  
• The selected P2 card is formatted.  
3
Press the MENU button.  
• Thumbnails menu are displayed.  
MENU button  
EXIT button  
Operation lever  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic shooting operations (continued)  
P2 card recording times  
Splitting clips recorded on P2 cards  
This camera-recorder will automatically generate  
additional clips for a continuous recording on  
an 8 GB or higher capacity P2 card when the  
recording exceeds the durations given below.  
Even so, a P2 device will handle such clips as  
a single clip in thumbnail operations (display,  
delete, recover, copy, etc.). Such recordings may  
be handled as separate clips by nonlinear editing  
software or a PC.  
P2 cards available to the AG-HPX250P/EN  
This camera-recorder supports the optional  
AJ-P2C064AG (64 GB) and AJ-P2E032XG (32 GB)  
P2 cards, and other 4 GB to 64 GB P2 cards (as of  
Sep. 2011).  
This unit cannot use AJ-P2C002SG (2 GB)  
cards.  
Depending on the type of P2 card used, you  
may need to update the camera-recorder  
driver.  
Recording format  
Continuous  
· “Updating the firmware incorporated into the  
unit” (Page 158)  
For the latest information not available in  
the Operating Instructions, visit the support  
desk at the following website.  
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/  
recording time  
(excluding Native format)  
AVC-I 100  
DVCPRO HD  
Approx. 5 min.  
Approx. 10 min.  
Approx. 20 min.  
AVC-I 50  
DVCPRO50  
DVCPRO  
DV  
P2 card recording times  
(When using one 64 GB card)  
Recording  
format (codec)  
System mode  
Recording time  
AVC-I 100  
DVCPRO HD  
Approx. 64 min.  
HD (1080i, 720P)  
Approx. 128  
min.  
AVC-I 50  
Approx. 128  
min.  
DVCPRO50  
SD (480i, 576i)  
DVCPRO  
DV  
Approx. 256  
min.  
The above recording time is for normal  
recording. Recording in native mode  
will extend recording time depending on  
system mode.  
· “Recording format list” (Page 164)  
Use of 32 GB, 16 GB and 8 GB P2 cards  
will provide 1/2, 1/4 and 1/8, respectively of  
above recording times.  
The indicated capacities include a  
management area so the total area available  
for recording is somewhat smaller.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• If a P2 card is ejected during formatting or while  
its data is being accessed, “TURN POWER OFF”  
appears in the viewfinder and LCD monitor, and  
a warning is indicated by the tally lamp. If this  
happens, turn the power off and back on again.  
· When a card is ejected during formatting:  
Format the card again.  
Remove the P2 card  
1
Push the OPEN lever of the P2 card slot  
cover downward () and slide to open ().  
2
Check that the P2 card access lamp is not  
blinking orange.  
· When a card is ejected while its data is being  
accessed:  
The clips may be thrown out of order. (Page 78)  
Check the clips and repair them. “Restoring  
clips” (Page 85)  
3
4
Push the P2 card eject button and press it.  
Remove the P2 card.  
• Immediately after pre-recording, a P2 card  
inserted into an empty slot will not be immediately  
recognized.  
• During playback, a P2 card inserted into the  
empty slot will not be recognized and the P2  
card access lamp will not light. When playback is  
completed, the P2 card recognition will begin.  
You can use ACCESS LED on the OTHER  
FUNCTIONS screen to set the P2 card access  
lamps so that they will always be off. In this case,  
either turn off the power or wait until enough time  
has passed after inserting the cards or stopping  
operation before ejecting the cards.  
P2 card access  
lamp  
P2 card eject button  
3
4
• When a P2 card is removed in PB/THUMBNAIL  
mode or PC mode (USB HOST), the screen is  
updated once it is closed.  
However, the system returns to the thumbnail  
screen no matter which screen was displayed  
just prior to removing the card.  
Furthermore, if a P2 card remains in the other  
slot at this time, this card will be accessed so  
please be careful when removing P2 cards  
consecutively.  
• Do not eject the P2 card or turn the power off  
under the following circumstances, since doing  
so may cause a malfunction in the card:  
1
While the orange P2 card access lamp is  
blinking after the card is inserted (and until it  
stops blinking).  
Cautions in using P2 cards  
Before using a P2 card, be sure to format it with  
a P2 device.  
2
During recording, during the recording finish  
process, or while the access lamp is blinking.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using SD/SDHC memory cards  
You can use SD and SDHC memory cards (the  
Formatting SD memory card  
term “SD memory card” is used for both hereafter)  
to save and load SCENE files and USER files, and  
to upload clip meta data. (Page 58)  
1
2
Set the POWER/MODE switch to ON.  
(Page 25 of Vol. 1)  
Turn the POWER/MODE switch to set to PB/  
THUMBNAIL mode (PB/THUMBNAIL lamp  
illuminates).  
Installing and removing the SD  
memory card  
Installation  
3
4
Press the MENU button.  
1
2
Push the OPEN lever of the P2 card slot  
cover downward () and slide to open ().  
On the thumbnail menu, select OPERATION,  
FORMAT and then SD CARD. (Page 91)  
• Select EXIT to cancel the formatting.  
Insert the card while making sure it is  
oriented in the proper direction.  
THUMBNAIL  
DELETE  
OPERATION  
FORMAT  
PROPERTY  
META DATA  
HDD  
SLOT1  
SLOT2  
REPAIR CLIP  
RE-CONNECTI
SD CARD  
EXIT  
COPY  
EXIT  
EXCH.THUMBN
EXIT  
5
Select YES on the confirmation screen.  
• The selected SD memory card is formatted.  
Access lamp  
You can also format from the SD CARD  
FORMAT option on the setting CARD  
FUNCTIONS screen. (Page 150)  
• With SDHC cards, 32 KB of capacity will have  
been used.  
2
3
Close the P2 card/SD memory card slot  
cover.  
Removal  
1
Open the P2 card/SD memory card slot  
cover, and check that the access lamp is  
not lit.  
2
3
Press the card further into the unit, grasp  
the card, and then remove.  
Close the P2 card/SD memory card slot  
cover.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cautions in using SD memory cards  
SD memory cards used with the AG-HPX250P/EN  
should conform to SD or SDHC standards.  
Be sure to format cards using the AG-HPX250P/  
EN.  
SD memory cards with the following capacity can  
be used for the AG-HPX250P/EN.  
SDXC memory cards are not available for this  
product.  
SD (from 8 MB to 2 GB)  
SDHC (from 4 GB to 32 GB)  
For the latest information not available in the  
Operating Instructions, visit the P2 Support Desk at  
the following Web sites.  
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/  
• SD memory cards must not be used or stored in  
an environment where they may be  
· Exposed to high temperatures/humidities;  
· Exposed to water droplets; or  
· Electrically charged.  
• Be sure always close the cover when using an  
SD memory card.  
• See also “Checkpoints for using memory cards”  
(Page 162).  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the zoom function  
This camera-recorder has a 22 x optical zoom  
function.  
Zoom with the zoom lever or the zoom ring.  
Zoom lever (handle side)  
On the remote control  
Press ZOOM/VOL to zoom with the motor drive.  
• Zoom speed is fixed at medium.  
Zoom ring  
ZOOM/VOL button  
Zoom lever (grip side)  
HANDLE ZOOM switch  
ZOOM switch  
Zoom lever  
Set the ZOOM switch to SERVO so that you can  
use the motor-driven zoom.  
T : Zoom in  
W : Zoom out  
Gently press the zoom button on the grip to zoom  
slowly, firmly press to zoom faster.  
Zoom lever (handle side)  
You can change the zoom speed on the handle  
zoom button by selecting one of three speeds with  
the HANDLE ZOOM switch.  
Set the HANDLE ZOOM switch speeds by going  
to the setup menus, SW MODE screen HANDLE  
ZOOM. (Page 138)  
Zoom ring  
Set the ZOOM switch to MANUAL so that you can  
use the zoom ring.  
You cannot use the zoom ring if the ZOOM switch  
is set to SERVO. Trying to use it could damage  
the camera-recorder.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital zoom function  
Assign the D.ZOOM function to USER MAIN or  
any of the USER 1 – 4 buttons to enable use of the  
digital zoom. (Page 39)  
Each press of the USER button to which D.ZOOM  
is assigned switches the zoom ratio in the following  
order: OFF (x1) → x2 → x5 → x10 → OFF (x1).  
• The viewfinder and the LCD monitor indicate the  
zoom ratio when a setting other than OFF (x1) is  
selected.  
• “Using the USER buttons” (Page 39)  
Please take note of the following points  
regarding use of the digital zoom function.  
• Digital zoom is not available when the DRS  
(dynamic range stretcher) function (Page 133)  
or the SCAN REVERSE function (Page 136) is  
running.  
• The FBC (flash band compensation) function  
(Page 38) is not available when the digital zoom  
function is running. The FBC function becomes  
available again when digital zoom is switched  
back to OFF.  
• Operating the DRS function or SCAN  
REVERSE function when the digital zoom  
function is running switches the digital zoom  
function off.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shooting in progressive mode  
In 1080i and 480i (576i) mode, this unit can  
In 24P/24PA, 24PN (native recording) and in  
perform progressive shooting when CAMERA  
MODE of the setting menu is set to 24P, 24PA, or  
30P (25P).  
When performing progressive shooting, the  
recording format can be set to native (which uses  
the camera’s shooting frame rate as is) or standard  
(which pulls the frame rate down to 59.94 (50)).  
30PN/25PN (native recording) at 720P, the  
camera starts recording in 5-frame, 4-frame  
and 2-frame segments, respectively. For  
this reason, to continue recording clips in  
a system mode using a different recording  
segmentation may break the continuity of  
the time code.  
The camera uses internal memory for  
recording, when recording starts as soon  
as a P2 card is inserted or the camera is  
powered up. In this situation, recording  
cannot be stopped until P2 card recognition  
ends.  
Standard recording  
(pull-down recording)  
24P records with 2:3 pulldown and 30P (25P)  
records with 2:2 pulldown, and both record as  
59.94i (50i).  
To check P2 card status, press the DISP/  
MODE CHK button and check the row for  
SLOT 1 and 2 displayed in the viewfinder or  
LCD monitor.  
The camera-recorder can also handle video shot in  
the 24PA mode (2:3:3:2 advanced pulldown).  
Note that AVC-Intra does not support pulldown  
recording.  
An editing system that supports 24PA  
(2:3:3:2 advanced pulldown) will enable  
editing with less quality loss than 24P (2:3  
pulldown).  
Record at standard 24P if a 24PA  
compatible editing system will not be used.  
A
B
C
D
Camera-recorder  
capture  
(1080/24P over 60i)  
2:3 pull-down  
recording  
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De  
Native recording  
This format extracts and records only effective  
frames when 1080i mode is used with 24PN or  
30PN (25PN) AVC-Intra mode.  
Furthermore, native recording format for both  
DVCPRO HD and AVC-Intra is supported with  
720P, enabling recording of 2 – 2.5x longer than  
pull down recording.  
Also in native recording, the output of camera-  
recorder video and playback video is a 59.94 (50)  
frame rate.  
A
B
C
D
Camera-recorder  
capture (1080/24PN)  
2:3 pull-down  
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De  
Recording  
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
Camera-recorder  
capture (720/24PN)  
2:3 pull-down  
A  
A
A
Bꢀ  
B
B
Cꢀ  
C
Dꢀ  
D
D
Recording  
B
C
D
Active frame  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording with Variable Frame Rate (VFR)  
In 1080i and 720P mode, this unit can shoot  
Note the following about native VFR  
recording.  
Pre-recording, loop recording, interval  
recording, one-shot recording, and one-clip  
recording are not available.  
using frame skipping (under cranking) and high  
speed recording (over cranking). You can select  
native (PN) recording mode and standard (OVER)  
recording.  
1394 output is not available during  
recording and recording standby.  
Changing Scene Dial position during  
recording does not change VFR on and off  
position.  
Sound cannot be recorded. *1  
At this time, no audio is output and  
Native VFR recording  
1
2
In 1080i or 720P mode, set REC FORMAT on  
the setting menu SYSTEM SETUP screen to  
AVC-I 100/24PN (or 30PN, 25PN).  
In the SCENE FILE screen, set the menu  
option VFR to ON and the menu option  
FRAME RATE to suit shooting purposes.  
” is displayed over the audio level  
A. REC  
meter. “VFR ON, NO AUDIO RECORDING”  
is also displayed when recording starts.  
The time code is locked to Rec Run. *1  
Thumbnail screens are created 1 frame  
later than video recorded on a P2 card, but  
this is not a malfunction.  
You can also change the frame rate using  
the SHTR/F.RATE dial.  
• “Setting FRAME RATE mode” (Page 51)  
The screen may be distorted when  
changing the FRAME RATE setting.  
Gain is fixed to 0 dB when set to 4 frames  
or less.  
3
Press the START/STOP button.  
This starts recording in the VFR mode (native  
VFR).  
Furthermore, AGC, auto iris, auto focus,  
and ATW do not function and must be  
operated manually.  
Red, blue, or green points may appear on  
the screen when the frame rate is low. This  
is not a fault.  
*1 In 24PN/30PN (25PN) recording modes,  
when the frame rate is 24 and 30 (25) frames  
per second, respectively, audio can also be  
recorded. The time code can be set to Free  
Run (F-RUN).  
This mode can be combined with the AVC-I 100,  
AVC-I 50, 30PN (25PN), and 24PN recording  
formats.  
You can also select DVCPRO HD with 720P.  
• “Setting FRAME RATE mode” (Page 51)  
• “SYSTEM SETUP screen” (Page 135)  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording with Variable Frame Rate (VFR) (continued)  
Standard VFR recording  
With AVC-Intra or DVCPRO HD in 1080i,  
(pulldown recording)  
clips are recorded as 60i, 60P (50i, 50P)  
with pull down information not recorded.  
Audio playback is disabled when a frame  
rate converter is used to extract active  
frames for over and under-cranking.  
1
In 1080i or 720P mode, set REC FORMAT on  
the setting menu SYSTEM SETUP screen to  
AVC-I 100/60i (60P) (or 50i, 50P).  
2
In the SCENE FILE screen, set the menu  
option VFR to ON and the menu option  
FRAME RATE to suit shooting purposes.  
Note the following about standard VFR  
recording.  
Pre-recording, loop recording, interval  
recording, one-shot recording, and one-clip  
recording are not available.  
You can also change the frame rate using  
the SHTR/F.RATE dial.  
1394 output is available during recording  
and recording standby, but not in AVC Intra  
mode.  
Changing Scene Dial position during  
recording does not change VFR on and off  
position.  
• “Setting FRAME RATE mode” (Page 51)  
3
Press the START/STOP button.  
This starts recording in the VFR mode  
(pulldown recording).  
Sound is recorded.  
This mode can be combined with the AVC-I  
100/60P (50P), AVC-I 50/60P (50P) 30PN, and  
DVCPROHD/60P (50P) recording formats in 720P  
system mode, and AVC-I 100/60i (50i), AVC-I 50/60i  
(50i), DVCPROHD/60i (50i) in 1080i system mode.  
• “Setting FRAME RATE mode” (Page 51)  
• “SYSTEM SETUP screen” (Page 135)  
The screen may be distorted when  
changing the FRAME RATE setting.  
Gain is fixed to 0 dB when set to 4 frames  
or less.  
Furthermore, AGC, auto iris and ATW do not  
function and must be operated manually.  
Red, blue, or green points may appear on  
the screen when the frame rate is low. This  
is not a fault.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using progressive mode and VFR recording function  
Standard speed for film production  
Screen production normally requires a 24 fps (24 frames per second) frame rate (normal speed) for  
screening a film. Making the settings described below will provide film-quality playback. The 720P  
progressive mode and cine-like gamma will make video look like it was shot with a film camera-recorder.  
Standard settings for film production  
SYSTEM MODE settings  
Recording frame rate  
SYSTEM MODE  
Other settings  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
REC FORMAT  
VFR  
(AVC-I 50/24PN)  
(DVCPROHD/24PN)  
720-59.94P  
OFF  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
(AVC-I 50/24PN)  
(DVCPROHD/60i)  
24 frames  
REC FORMAT  
1080-59.94i  
CAMERA MODE*1  
VFR  
24P, 24PA  
OFF  
*1: Only when the menu option REC FORMAT is set to DVCPROHD/60i in the SYSTEM SETUP screen.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording with Variable Frame Rate (VFR) (continued)  
Shooting at standard speed for producing commercials and TV programs  
When producing videos for display on a television screen such as HDTV/SDTV broadcast, a frame rate  
of 30 fps (30 frames per second), 25 fps (25 frames per second) for 50 Hz, is standard (x1). The settings  
below allow you to obtain the kind of playback used for broadcast programs. This permits film-like video  
recording of commercials and music clips that also provide a frame rate suitable for broadcasting.  
Standard settings for producing commercials and dramas  
SYETEM MODE settings  
Recording frame rate  
SYSTEM MODE  
Other settings  
AVC-I 100/30PN  
REC FORMAT  
VFR  
(AVC-I 50/30PN)  
(DVCPROHD/30PN)  
720-59.94P  
OFF  
AVC-I 100/30PN  
(AVC-I 50/30PN)  
(DVCPROHD/60i)  
30 frames  
REC FORMAT  
1080-59.94i  
720-50P  
CAMERA MODE*1  
VFR  
30P  
OFF  
AVC-I 100/25PN  
(AVC-I 50/25PN)  
(DVCPROHD/25PN)  
REC FORMAT  
VFR  
OFF  
AVC-I 100/25PN  
(AVC-I 50/25PN)  
(DVCPROHD/50i)  
25 frames  
REC FORMAT  
1080-50i  
CAMERA MODE*1  
VFR  
25P  
OFF  
*1 Only when the menu option REC FORMAT is set to DVCPROHD/60i (50i) in the SYSTEM SETUP  
screen.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Undercranking effects  
This effect produces the quick motion often used for showing clouds drifting across the sky, crowds of  
people swarming past a solitary standing individual, a kung fu demonstration and other performances. For  
example, selecting a VFR recording frame rate of 12 fps when shooting at a 24P recording format yields a  
fast-motion effect of approx. 2x normal speed.  
Standard setup for undercranking effects  
SYSTEM MODE settings  
Recording frame rate  
SYSTEM MODE  
Other settings  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
(AVC-I 50/24PN)  
ON  
REC FORMAT  
1080-59.94i  
1 to 22 frames  
1 to 24 frames  
VFR  
FRAME RATE  
Set to 23 frames or less  
AVC-I 100/25PN  
(AVC-I 50/25PN)  
REC FORMAT  
1080-50i  
VFR  
ON  
FRAME RATE  
Set to 24 frames or less  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
(AVC-I 50/24PN)  
REC FORMAT  
(DVCPROHD/24PN)  
720-59.94P  
1 to 22 frames  
1 to 24 frames  
VFR  
ON  
FRAME RATE  
Set to 22 frames or less  
AVC-I 100/25PN  
(AVC-I 50/25PN)  
(DVCPROHD/25PN)  
REC FORMAT  
720-50P  
VFR  
ON  
FRAME RATE  
Set to 24 frames or less  
• With the menu option REC FORMAT set to DVCPROHD/60P (50P), you can use a nonlinear editing  
system to generate quick motion effects from the resulting footage.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording with Variable Frame Rate (VFR) (continued)  
Overcranking effects  
Overcranking produces slow-motion playback, which is frequently used in climax scenes, or for dramatic  
effects like car chases and action scenes. For example, selecting a recording frame rate of 60 fps when  
shooting a 24P recording format yields a slow-motion effect that is 2.5 times normal speed. Shooting 720P  
progressive video will produce smooth and highquality slow-motion.  
Furthermore, with 1080i, a slow motion effect of 1.25 can be gained if you set the recording frame rate to  
30 fps when recording was performed using 24P, a recording format for specifying the playback frame rate.  
Standard setup for overcranking effects  
SYSTEM MODE setup  
Recording frame rate  
SYSTEM MODE  
Other settings  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
(AVC-I 50/24PN)  
ON  
REC FORMAT  
1080-59.94i  
25 to 30 frames  
25 to 60 frames  
VFR  
FRAME RATE  
Set to 25 frames or more  
AVC-I 100/24PN  
(AVC-I 50/24PN)  
(DVCPROHD/24PN)  
REC FORMAT  
720-59.94P  
720-50P  
VFR  
ON  
FRAME RATE  
Set to 25 frames or more  
AVC-I 100/25PN  
(AVC-I 50/25PN)  
(DVCPROHD/25PN)  
REC FORMAT  
26 to 50 frames  
VFR  
ON  
FRAME RATE  
Set to 26 frames or more  
• With the menu option REC FORMAT set to DVCPROHD/60P (50P), you can use a nonlinear editing  
system to generate slow motion effects from the resulting footage.  
• A slow motion effect cannot be gained if SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-50i and REC FORMAT is set to  
AVC-I***/25PN.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flow effect shooting  
This way of shooting provides a flow effect and  
may, for instance, be used to shoot a subject on  
a far side of a road with a stream of fast-moving  
cars as the flow, in such a way that the stationary  
subject comes into focus though the cars.  
1
Set SYSTEM MODE on the setting menu  
SYSTEM SETUP screen to 1080-59.94i (50i),  
REC FORMAT to AVC-I 100 (50)/60i (50i) or  
DVCPRO HD/60i (50i), and VFR to ON.  
Set FRAME RATE to a low value suitable for  
the shooting purpose.  
Setting can be performed in the same way for  
720P.  
2
Press the START/STOP button.  
This starts recording in the VFR mode.  
During flow effect shooting - general  
notes  
• Please take note of the following points when  
selecting AVC-Intra recording.  
· When 1080i is selected, the image signal and  
HD SDI output signal recorded are 60i (50i) and  
all frames are effective frames.  
· With both 1080i and 720P, pull down information  
is not attached to recorded clips.  
When you wish to use this information, select  
DVCPRO HD mode with 720P.  
• Audio recording will be recorded onto P2 card at  
all frame rates.  
• Fixed shutter and synchro scan are valid.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shooting in manual mode  
Set the unit to manual mode when manually  
adjusting the focus, iris, gain and white balance.  
Temporarily switching to auto focus  
Even if you have switched FOCUS to M (MANUAL)  
the camera-recorder will focus automatically while  
you press down PUSH AUTO.  
Switching to manual mode  
Slide the AUTO/MANUAL switch to MANUAL to  
switch to the manual mode.  
Switching to manual focus assist mode  
To change from the manual focus mode to the  
manual focus assist mode, set MF ASSIST to ON  
on the setting menu SW MODE screen.  
You can make coarse adjustments to the focus  
in manual focus assist mode by turning the focus  
ring about half the amount you would turn it in  
manual focus mode.  
A
(
on the viewfinder and LCD go out.)  
• Fine adjustment is made automatically after you  
operated the focus ring.  
• If the focus differs considerably form the manually  
set focus, the focus may not be set correctly.  
• Automatic adjustment is not performed until you  
operate the focus ring for the next time.  
AUTO/MANUAL switch  
Manual focusing  
• Auto focus may not work properly if there is  
flickering. Select a shutter speed suited to the  
ambient light. (Page 49)  
Focus ring  
• If the auto focus mode is set with any format  
except 60i (50i) and 60P (50P), controlling the  
focus will take slightly longer than in the normal  
focus mode.  
• If you have set ON for the AF item on the setting  
menu AUTO SW screen, auto focusing will occur  
regardless of the position of the FOCUS switch  
when the auto mode has been established. (Page  
140)  
PUSH AUTO  
button  
FOCUS  
switch  
AUTO/MANUAL switch  
• When the display is set to macro shooting,  
the screen display for “AF”, “MF”, and “MA” is  
reversed black and white characters.  
1
2
Use the AUTO/MANUAL switch to switch to  
manual mode.  
Use the FOCUS switch to choose how to  
control focusing.  
A (AUTO): (Auto focus mode)  
Adjusts focus automatically.  
M (MANUAL): (Manual focus mode)  
Turn the focus ring by hand.  
∞:  
The camera-recorder first focuses on infinity,  
then it switches to manual focus.  
The FOCUS switch automatically moves  
back to M (MANUAL) after you move it to ∞.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FOCUS BAR: (DISPLAY SETUP menu)  
The length of the bar indicates whether the image  
is in focus.  
The focus bar extends to the far right when the  
image is in focus.  
Using focus assist function  
Pressing the FOCUS ASSIST button magnifies the  
image at the center to facilitate focusing.  
Set the menu option FOCUS BAR to ON in the  
DISPLAY SETUP screen to display the focus bar.  
Out of focus  
The bar extends to  
the right when the  
image is in focus.  
FOCUS ASSIST button  
This function magnifies only the image at the  
center of the LCD monitor and viewfinder.  
It is not superimposed on signals output  
via the VIDEO OUT, SDI OUT and HDMI OUT  
connectors.  
EXPANDED: (FOCUS ASSIST button)  
Trebles the size of the center of the image.  
The status indication and the zebra pattern  
disappears and EXPANDED appears at the top  
of the screen.  
EXPANDED  
• The EXPANDED display is available only during  
recording and does not work in external input  
mode.  
In VIDEO OUT, SDI OUT, and HDMI OUT, the  
center of the image is not magnified and  
status indications do not appear.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shooting in manual mode (continued)  
Iris adjustments  
Adjusting the gain  
When the display is dark, increase the gain to  
brighten the display.  
IRIS ring  
IRIS button  
GAIN switch  
1
2
If the camera-recorder is in auto mode,  
use the AUTO/MANUAL switch to switch to  
manual mode. (Page 28)  
1
2
If the camera-recorder is in auto mode,  
use the AUTO/MANUAL switch to switch to  
manual mode. (Page 28)  
Press the IRIS button to switch how to  
adjust the aperture of lens.  
AUTO IRIS:  
Adjust the iris automatically.  
MANUAL IRIS:  
Switch the gain with the GAIN switch.  
L: Set here under normal conditions.  
(The default value is 0 dB.)  
Adjust the iris manually.  
M: Increase the gain of the image amplifier.  
(The default value is 6 dB.)  
3
Turn the IRIS ring to adjust the aperture of  
lens when in the manual iris mode.  
In the auto iris mode, the lens iris can be  
corrected using this ring.  
H: Increase the gain of the image amplifier.  
(The default value is 12 dB.)  
You can change each L, M and H gain values using  
the LOW GAIN, MID GAIN and HIGH GAIN items  
on the setting menu SW MODE screen. (Page 138)  
In auto mode, auto gain is available regardless of  
the GAIN switch setting when a setting other than  
OFF is selected under AGC on the setting menu  
AUTO SW screen. (Page 140)  
If you have set ON under A.IRIS on the setting  
menu AUTO SW screen, auto iris will be forcibly  
selected when auto mode has been established.  
(Page 140)  
• This unit’s iris F number when it is open is F1.6  
at full WIDE and F3.2 at full TELEPHOTO.  
The iris display in the viewfinder or on the LCD  
when the iris is open is OPEN at full WIDE and  
F3.2 or OPEN at full TELEPHOTO.  
In variable frame rate (VFR) mode, gain is fixed  
to 0 dB when the frame rate is set to 4 frames or  
less.  
You can display the brightness level for the  
center part of the screen by pressing a USER  
button (Page 39) to which Y GET has been  
assigned.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using super gain  
You can increase the gain level further when  
shooting in dark space.  
Set SUPER GAIN on the setting menu SW MODE  
screen to 24 dB, 30 dB or BOTH.  
Cycles to the next value in the order 24 dB →  
30 dB → OFF when pressing USER button in  
BOTH.  
You can switch to the selected gain by pressing a  
USER button to which S GAIN has been assigned.  
• “Using the USER buttons” (Page 39)  
• In variable frame rate (VFR) mode, super gain  
is not available when the frame rate is set to  
4 frames or less.  
• AGC is not available when super gain is selected,  
even if AUTO/MANUAL is set to AUTO.  
Light intensity adjustments  
Use the ND FILTER dial to change the ND Filter  
used (filter to change light intensity).  
OFF: ND filter is not used.  
1/4: Cuts light intensity by up to about 1/4.  
1/16: Cuts light intensity by up to about 1/16.  
1/64: Cuts light intensity by up to about 1/64.  
ND FILTER dial  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the white balance and black balance  
To record high-quality video with the AG-HPX250P/  
EN, the black and white balances must be adjusted  
according to conditions.  
1
Set the GAIN and WHITE BAL switches.  
• For the WHITE BAL switch, select A or B as  
a position to save the adjustment value.  
If white balance and black balance adjustments  
are made while the video image is distorted  
due to GENLOCK, the adjustments may not  
be correct. Wait for the video image to return  
to normal before performing white balance and  
black balance adjustments again.  
2
Adjust the ND FILTER dial according to the  
light conditions.  
For examples of ND FILTER dial, see “Light  
intensity adjustments” (Page 31).  
3
Place a white pattern at a point where the  
light conditions match those for the light  
source of the subject. Then zoom-in on the  
white pattern so that white color appears in  
the screen.  
• A white object (cloth or wall) may be used  
instead of a white pattern. The illustration  
below shows the required size for the white  
space.  
Adjusting the white balance  
Whenever light conditions change, the white  
balance must be readjusted.  
To adjust the white balance, follow the steps on the  
right.  
ND FILTER dial  
This control adjusts the amount of light  
entering the MOS sensor.  
Do not point the camera-recorder at a high-  
brightness area.  
The white object must appear at the center  
of the screen.  
1/3 or more of the screen in width  
1/3 or more  
of the screen  
in height  
AWB button  
Use for automatic control  
of white balance.  
WHITE BAL switch  
Set to A or B.  
GAIN switch  
Normally set to 0 dB. If this is too  
dark, adjust gain as necessary.  
4
Adjust the lens iris.  
• Use the Y GET function (Page 122) and adjust  
the iris to a approximately 70 % of incoming  
light.  
5
6
Press the AWB button.  
• The switch returns to the central position with  
the white balance automatically adjusted.  
During an adjustment, the viewfinder  
or LCD monitor displays the following  
message:  
AWB Ach ACTIVE  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting auto tracking white balance (ATW)  
This camera-recorder is equipped with an auto  
tracking white balance (ATW) function that  
automatically adjusts the white balance of images  
in accordance with lighting conditions.  
The ATW function can be assigned to the WHITE  
BAL switch B by setting the menu option ATW in  
the SW MODE screen to B ch.  
7
8
The adjustment will take effect in a few  
seconds, and the following message will  
appear:  
• The adjusted value is automatically stored in  
the selected memory (A or B).  
AWB A OK 3.2K  
• “C TEMP+7” to “C TEMP-7” will appear when  
COLOR TEMP of the scene file is set to the  
value other than 0.  
Also, you can allocate the ATW function to USER  
MAIN or USER buttons 1 to 4.  
• “Using the USER buttons” (Page 39)  
If the subject’s color temperature is lower  
than 2300K or higher than 9900K the  
following message appears:  
• If the arrow points down (↓) the actual color  
temperature is lower than the temperature  
indicated. If the arrow points up (↑) the actual  
temperature is higher than the temperature  
indicated.  
Cancelling auto tracking white balance  
Press the USER button to which ATW was  
assigned a second time or change the WHITE BAL  
switch position. If ATW was assigned to the WHITE  
BAL switch B, the USER button cannot be used to  
cancel the function.  
This function does not provide a 100 %  
accurate white balance. The tracking  
performance relative to changes in ambient  
lighting and white balance performance  
have been given a degree of latitude.  
In variable frame rate (VFR) mode, ATW is  
not available when the frame rate is set to  
4 frames or less.  
AWB A OK 2.3K ↓  
When you have no time to adjust the white  
balance  
Position the WHITE BAL switch at PRST.  
You can switch between 3200 K and 5600 K by  
pressing the AWB button.  
When the white balance has not been  
automatically adjusted  
When the white balance has not been successfully  
adjusted, the viewfinder or LCD monitor displays  
an error message.  
Error message  
Description  
→ Adjustment details  
AWB Ach (or Bch)  
NG  
The color temperature is too  
high or too low.  
LOW LIGHT  
There is insufficient light.  
Increases the amount of  
light. Also increases gain.  
LEVEL OVER  
There is too much light.  
Reduces the amount of  
light. Also reduces gain.  
Viewfinder displays related to white balance  
• For details on the screen display of the  
viewfinder, see “Screen displays” (Page 121).  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the white balance and black balance (continued)  
Adjusting the black balance  
During a black balance adjustment, light is  
The black balance must be adjusted when:  
You use your AG-HPX250P/EN the first time.  
Your AG-HPX250P/EN has not been used for  
some time.  
• The ambient temperature has changed  
substantially.  
automatically cut off.  
Black balance adjustment is not available  
during recording.  
Pressing the START/STOP button during  
ABB adjustment will not start recording on  
a P2 card.  
• The gain switchover value has been changed.  
• The menu options SYSTEM MODE and REC  
FORMAT in the SYSTEM SETUP screen.  
Adjust the black balance before shooting to ensure  
optimum video quality.  
AWB button  
Use for automatic control of  
white balance.  
1
Press and hold the AWB button for  
approximately 2 seconds.  
• Black balance is adjusted after the white  
balance.  
As white balance is adjusted first, set the  
conditions for white balance adjustment  
beforehand.  
2
3
During adjustment, the viewfinder displays  
the following message:  
ABB ACTIVE  
The adjustment will take effect in a few  
seconds and the following message will  
appear:  
ABB END  
The adjusted value is automatically stored in  
the memory.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shooting techniques for different targets  
Low-angle shooting  
Scan reverse shooting  
Low-angle shooting can be performed using the  
handle side START/STOP button by releasing  
() the hold switch on this button from the HOLD  
position.  
By setting SCAN REVERSE on the setting menu  
SYSTEM SETUP screen to ON, video can be  
vertically/horizontally inverted when displaying and  
recording.  
To prevent accidental operation of the START/  
STOP button on the handle side when not in use,  
set the hold switch to HOLD.  
Zebra pattern  
The AG-HPX250P/EN can display two zebra  
patterns.  
Turning the ZEBRA switch on displays the zebra  
pattern set in the menu in the viewfinder and LCD  
monitor. A menu setting makes it possible to also  
display the zebra pattern on video output via the  
VIDEO OUT connector.  
HOLD switch  
START/STOP button (handle side)  
ZEBRA button  
Use the DISPLAY SETUP screen to set the level of  
zebra pattern display. (Page 147)  
Self-portrait shooting  
ZEBRA 2  
Image level  
When shooting with the LCD display angled 180  
degrees towards the lens, you can set the menu  
option SELF SHOOT to MIRROR, to horizontally  
flip the video image on the LCD display, and allow  
you to view a mirror image while shooting.  
Note that only the video image on the LCD monitor  
is horizontally flipped, not the actual video being  
recorded.  
ON  
OFF  
SPOT  
109%  
ZEBRA 2  
DETECT  
ZEBRA 1  
DETECT  
0%  
SPOT:  
A video level between ZEBRA1 and ZEBRA2  
displays a zebra pattern.  
To display a zebra pattern on video output via the  
VIDEO OUT connector, make the required settings  
in the OUTPUT SEL screen. (Page 145)  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shooting techniques for different targets (continued)  
Checking and displaying shooting  
status  
Center marker display  
A center marker is displayed when the menu option  
MARKER in the DISPLAY SETUP screen is set to  
ON. (Page 147)  
DISP/MODE CHK button  
The center marker display appears only on  
the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder. It  
is not superimposed on signals output via  
the VIDEO OUT, SDI OUT and HDMI OUT  
connectors.  
When you hold down the DISP/MODE CHK  
button during recording standby or recording, all  
the information including the setting status of the  
shooting functions and a list of functions allocated  
to the USER buttons, will be displayed. When  
you release the button, the normal display will be  
restored.  
Safety zone markers  
A safety zone marker is displayed when the menu  
option SAFETY ZONE is selected in the DISPLAY  
SETUP screen. (Page 148)  
• “Using the USER buttons” (Page 39)  
When you push the DISP/MODE CHK button  
during recording standby or recording, all the  
information will be unshown. When you press the  
button again, the normal display will be restored.  
The information is retained even if you turn off the  
unit’s power or switch to another operation mode.  
Safety zone markers appear only on the  
LCD monitor and in the viewfinder. They  
are not superimposed on signals output  
via the VIDEO OUT, SDI OUT and HDMI OUT  
connectors.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the image size  
Optical Image Stabilizer  
When recording in 480i/576i mode, you can  
change the size (aspect ratio) of the images that  
you record.  
Use the Optical Image Stabilizer (OIS) to reduce  
the effects of camera-recorder shake when  
shooting by hand.  
Select the aspect ratio in the setup menus,  
SYSTEM SETUP screen, ASPECT CONV. (Page 137)  
• Refer to the section “Using the setup menus”  
(Page 28 of Vol. 1) for menu operation.  
Press the OIS button to turn the function on and  
off.  
appears on the screen when this function is on.  
Turn the function off when using a tripod for more  
natural images.  
SIDE CROP:  
OIS button  
Recorded in the regular 4:3 aspect ratio.  
The left and right edges of the image are cut.  
LETTER BOX:  
Recorded in the 16:9 aspect ratio.  
Black bands are recorded at the top and bottom  
of the image.  
When LETTER BOX is selected, black bands  
are not displayed at the top and bottom of the  
viewfinder or LCD monitor as the screen size  
is 16:9. As such, “LT.BOX” is displayed on the  
screen.  
• This function will not be as effective when the  
vibration is severe or when tracking a moving  
subject.  
DRS (Dynamic Range Stretcher)  
function  
This function compresses the video signal level  
while maintaining contrast to extend the dynamic  
range making it possible to correctly render  
highlight areas without overexposure and loss of  
detail that would otherwise occur.  
When using 1080i, the DRS function is not  
available if shooting with 24P, 30P, 25P or VFR  
(variable frame rate).  
SQUEEZE:  
The recorded images are squeezed horizontally  
so that they are shown as 16:9 images on a  
compatible wide-screen television.  
This function runs when DRS on the setting menu  
SCENE FILE screen is set to ON. (Page 133)  
You can change the level of compression using  
DRS EFFECT. (Page 133)  
You can allocate DRS ON/OFF to a USER button.  
(Page 39)  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shooting techniques for different targets (continued)  
FBC (Flash Band Compensation)  
Using FBC  
This camera-recorder comes with a function to  
compensate for and minimize light band (flash  
band) interference that occurs with the MOS  
imager when shooting in an environment where  
flash photography is taking place.  
FBC goes on when the brightness of the  
lower half of the image differs markedly from  
the previous half, which could be caused by  
light from a camera flash or other strong light  
source. Since FBC may be incorrectly activated  
in certain shooting environments, for example,  
in zooming that includes a bright window,  
be sure to use the function only for shooting  
footage exposed to flash light.  
Time flow  
Flash light  
In some shooting environments adequate FBC  
effect may not be obtained even when a flash  
goes off.  
Image recorded  
Flash band  
(FBC off)  
FBC requirements  
Setting FBC function  
You can use FBC in the “FBC operation  
enabled mode” below.  
Even if the FBC function is switched ON, it  
will be forced to OFF if the mode is switched  
to one not shown in “FBC operation enabled  
mode”.  
Assign the FBC function to a USER button.  
Press the USER button to which the FBC function  
has been assigned to turn it on and automatically  
detect and compensate for flash light from still  
cameras.  
When you wish to use this mode again, set  
the camera to a mode shown below then  
press the USER button and switch the FBC  
function ON.  
• “Using the USER buttons” (Page 39)  
The status display indicates “FBC”  
when the FBC function is on. *1  
Even if the FBC function is switched ON, it  
will temporarily be switched OFF if shutter is  
switched ON or the digital zoom is operated.  
The FBC function returns to the ON state after  
shutter or digital zoom is switched OFF.  
The FBC function is switched OFF if the  
power switch is set to OFF.  
T C 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6 : 2 3  
1 2 1 9 9 9 min  
1 - C L I P  
P 2  
L A C K  
I
-
P A U S E  
U S E R - 1  
FBC  
1394  
1 0 8 0 i  
100  
AVC-I  
60  
P 3 .2K  
*1 Not displayed when the menu option OTHER  
DISPLAY in the DISPLAY SETUP screen is set  
to OFF.  
FBC operation enabled mode  
1080/60i*2, 1080/50i*2, 720/60P*2, 720/50P*2,  
480/60i, 576/50i,  
*2: VFR is limited to OFF.  
Shutter OFF  
The following phenomena that may occur  
in video that includes flash light is due to  
FBC compensation and not indicative of a  
malfunction.  
Moving subjects may appear to be  
stationary for an instant.  
Digital zoom OFF  
Resolution decreases in video exposed to  
flash light.  
Horizontal lines appear in video footage  
exposed to flash light.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHOT MARK:  
Using the USER buttons  
Assigns the shot marker function. (Page 41)  
MAG A. LVL:  
Assigns a function that magnifies the audio level  
meter. (Page 55)  
You can allocate the selected function to USER  
MAIN and USER buttons 1 to 4.  
USER1 – 3 buton  
LVL METER:  
Allocates a function that switches between CH1/2  
and CH3/4 for the audio level meter display and  
audio channel for headphones, built-in speaker,  
AUDIO OUT terminal output, and HDMI OUT  
output while the button is held down.  
PRE REC:  
Assigns a function that turns the PRE REC  
function on and off. (Page 44)  
WFM:  
Assigns a function that switches WAVE FORM  
display.  
USER MAIN buton  
USER4 buton  
Selectable Functions  
SPOTLIGHT:  
The WAVE FORM display is selected using the  
menu option WFM in the SW MODE screen.  
This is the same function as the WFM button.  
(Page 40)  
Assigns auto iris control on/off for spotlight.  
BACKLIGHT:  
Assigns auto iris control on/off for backlight  
compensation. (Page 40)  
LAST CLIP:  
ATW:  
Allocates a function to delete the clip shot  
immediately beforehand. (Page 42)  
FBC:  
Turns the FBC function on or off. (Page 38)  
LCD B.L:  
Turns the ATW function on or off. (Page 33)  
ATW LOCK:  
Pressing this lock during ATW operation locks  
the white balance. Press again to start the ATW  
function again.  
Allocates a function to switch the backlight  
brightness of the LCD monitor.  
The setting is linked to the LCD BACKLIGHT on  
the setting menu DISPLAY SETUP screen. (Page  
148)  
S.GAIN:  
Allocates a function that increases gain to 24 dB  
or greater.  
The gain value can be set with SUPER GAIN on  
the setting menu SW MODE screen. (Page 138)  
D.ZOOM:  
Allocates the DIGITAL ZOOM function.  
Each time the button is pressed, the setting  
changes in the following order: x2 → x5 → x10 →  
OFF (x1). (Page 19)  
As factory settings, the following functions  
are allocated to the buttons displayed.  
USER MAIN : Y GET  
USER1  
USER2  
USER3  
USER4  
: BACKLIGHT  
: TEXT MEMO  
: DRS  
Y GET:  
Assigns a function that displays the brightness  
level at the center of the image.  
DRS:  
: SLOT SEL  
If you press a USER button to which one of  
the functions has been allocated, and then  
turn OFF the power during operation of the  
USER button function, the effect added to the  
image will not be retained.  
SPOTLIGHT, BACKLIGHT, ATW, ATW LOCK,  
S.GAIN, D.ZOOM, Y GET, WFM, MAG A.LVL,  
FBC  
Assigns a function that stretches the dynamic  
range.  
The setting is linked to the ON/OFF of setting of  
DRS on the setting menu SCENE FILE screen.  
(Page 37)  
TEXT MEMO:  
Assigns text memory recording. (Page 42)  
SLOT SEL:  
Assigns P2 card slot selection.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shooting techniques for different targets (continued)  
Backlight compensation  
Adjusting the volume while shooting  
Press the USER button you have allocated to the  
BACKLIGHT feature when shooting subjects lit  
from the back.  
BACK appears on the screen.  
Backlight compensation adjusts the iris so the  
subject doesn’t come out dark.  
Press the same USER button to turn the feature  
off.  
• “Using the USER buttons” (Page 39)  
Adjusting the volume  
Color bars  
Press the BARS button in CAMERA mode to output  
a color bar screen to a television or monitor so you  
can adjust them.  
Press the button again to turn the feature off.  
If you are monitoring the sound through  
BARS button  
headphones while shooting, you can adjust the  
volume with the PAGE/AUDIO MON/VAR button.  
• Adjustment of input audio level is performed with  
the AUDIO LEVEL knob. (Page 54)  
The color bar screen turns off and  
camera-recorder image appears.  
Backup recording  
If you have connected equipment to the 1394  
terminal (Page 103), you can make automatic backup  
recordings of whatever you are shooting.  
• “Control of external devices through 1394  
connection” (Page 106)  
A 1 kHz test tone is output in the color bar screen  
when LEVEL1 or LEVEL2 is selected under TEST  
TONE on the setting menu AUDIO SETUP screen.  
(Page 143)  
• The color bar can be recorded together with a  
1 kHz test tone.  
Waveform monitor function  
Press the WFM button in CAMERA mode to display  
a waveform of the image on the LCD monitor.  
Pressing the WFM button once again closes the  
waveform display.  
• WFM (Page 139) on the setting menu SW MODE  
screen allows you to switch between the  
waveform and vector display.  
• The viewfinder does not show the waveform  
display.  
• The waveform does not appear when the focus  
assist function is used.  
• The waveform display cannot be recorded.  
You can allocate the same function as the WFM  
button to USER buttons. (Page 39)  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-slot continuous recording  
Shot mark function  
If you insert two P2 cards into the two card slots,  
this function allows you to record continuously on  
the two cards.  
The marks attached to the thumbnails of clips  
are called shot marks. On the thumbnail screen  
monitor you can select only those clips with a shot  
mark and display them or play them back.  
• “Switching the thumbnail display” (Page 80)  
During recording, when you press the USER button  
to which the SHOT MARK function has been  
allocated, MARK ON appears in the LCD monitor  
or the viewfinder, and a shot mark is set for the  
thumbnail of the clip being recorded. If you press  
the button again, the shot mark is released.  
• “Using the USER buttons” (Page 39)  
You can also record continuously on three or more  
cards by replacing one card while data is being  
recorded on the other. (Hot swap recording)  
However, depending on when the P2 card is  
inserted into an empty slot (immediately after  
prerecording, or before or after continuous  
recording spanning two slots), there may be a  
delay in recognizing the P2 card.  
We recommend inserting the P2 card while there  
is at least one minute remaining on the card that is  
recording.  
You can change the slot for recording with one  
touch if you press a USER button to which the  
SLOT SEL has been allocated.  
A shot mark added during a pause after  
recording is added to the most recently  
recorded clip.  
Shot marks can be added also in the  
thumbnail display.  
The shot mark function is not available  
during loop recording, interval recording  
and one-shot recording. When this function  
is not available, pressing this button  
displays SHOT MARK INVALID.  
• “Using the USER buttons” (Page 39)  
You cannot change slots while recording so do  
this during recording standby.  
• Does not support hot swap playback.  
Shot marks can be set or cancelled in  
playback pause mode but not during  
playback.  
Shot marks cannot be set or deleted for  
video data created in a single hot-swap  
recording session consisting of multiple  
clips unless all the P2 cards that contain  
the video data for the entire session are  
inserted. In clips that consist of multiple  
clips like the one above, shot marks can be  
added only to the first clip of video data.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shooting techniques for different targets (continued)  
Text memo recording  
LAST CLIP DELETE function  
This function adds text memos at the video points  
on the clip now being recorded or played back.  
When you press the USER button to which the  
TEXT MEMO function has been allocated, the text  
memo will be recorded at that point.  
Assign LAST CLIP to any of the USER MAIN or  
USER 1 – 4 buttons to enable a convenient way to  
delete the last recorded clip.  
Pressing the USER button to which LAST CLIP  
was assigned displays a YES/NO confirmation  
dialog on the screen.  
• “Using the USER buttons” (Page 39)  
Select YES, and the last recorded clip is deleted  
and “LAST CLIP DELETE OK” is displayed.  
• “Using the USER buttons” (Page 39)  
On the thumbnail screen you can select only those  
clips where text memos have been added, and  
then either display those clips or play them back.  
• “Switching the thumbnail display” (Page 80)  
You can record up to a hundred text memos per  
clip.  
You cannot record text memos during loop  
recording, interval recording or one-shot  
recording.  
• Select NO to cancel clip deletion.  
• Clips cannot be deleted even when you press the  
button if you have switched to PB/THUMBNAIL  
mode or PC mode after shooting, when recording  
1394 input, or during menu display.  
Then it will not be possible to delete the clip by  
turning the power off and turning it back on.  
• In hot swap recording, the clip delete function is  
not available unless all the P2 cards containing  
data shot in one recording operation are inserted.  
• The clip delete function is not available when the  
one-clip recording is set.  
• “TEXT MEMO INVALID” appears when you  
cannot record text memos.  
Time stamp function  
Use the time stamp function to record date and  
time of shooting on the video.  
Select ON under TIME STAMP on the setting menu  
RECORDING SETUP screen.  
R
” prefixes the date and time display in the  
viewfinder and the LCD monitor when the time  
stamp function is on.  
R
• “  
” is not recorded on the video.  
• The size and location of the date and time  
characters will vary with the recording format.  
• The data recorded depends on the DATE/TIME  
setting on the setting menu DISPLAY SETUP  
screen. No data is recorded when OFF is  
selected.  
• This timestamp is superimposed on the video  
output from the DVCPRO/DV terminal.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using special recording modes  
During P2 card recording, the following special recording modes can be enabled from the RECORDING  
SETUP screen: pre-recording, interval recording, one-shot recording, loop recording, and one-clip  
recording.  
These recording modes (excluding one-clip recording) are available only with the following settings.  
One-clip recording mode is available in all recording modes, except when VFR is turned ON.  
SYSTEM MODE  
1080-59.94i  
REC FORMAT  
DVCPROHD/60i  
AVC-I 100/60i  
AVC-I 50/60i  
Other conditions  
Set CAMERA MODE to 60i or 30P.  
Turn VFR OFF.  
DVCPROHD/50i  
AVC-I 100/50i  
AVC-I 50/50i  
1080-50i  
720-59.94P  
720-50P  
Turn VFR OFF.  
DVCPROHD/60P  
AVC-I 100/60P  
AVC-I 50/60P  
Turn VFR OFF.  
DVCPROHD/50P  
AVC-I 100/50P  
AVC-I 50/50P  
Turn VFR OFF.  
DVCPRO50/60i  
DVCPRO/60i  
DV/60i  
480-59.94i  
576-50i  
Set CAMERA MODE to 60i or 30P.  
DVCPRO50/50i  
DVCPRO/50i  
DV/50i  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using special recording modes (continued)  
Pre-recording (PRE REC)  
Interval recording (INTERVAL REC)  
This function is used to start recording a certain  
number of seconds (approx. 3 seconds for HD  
recordings or approx. 7 seconds for SD recordings)  
before actual recording starts.  
This function is used to record 1 frame at the time  
interval set in the INTERVAL TIME item.  
1 frame  
1 frame  
1 frame  
recording  
recording  
recording  
Starting recording Stopping recording  
(time)  
(time)  
Actual recording  
time  
Set INTERVAL Set INTERVAL  
TIME setting TIME setting  
PRE REC time  
1
Check that the SYSTEM SETUP screen is  
set up as described on page 43.  
• Refer to the section “Using the setup menus”  
(Page 28 of Vol. 1) for menu operation.  
1
2
Check that the SYSTEM SETUP screen is  
set up as described on page 43.  
• Refer to the section “Using the setup menus”  
(Page 28 of Vol. 1) for menu operation.  
2
3
4
Select INTERVAL in the menu option  
PREREC MODE in the RECORDING SETUP  
screen. (Page 141)  
Select ON in the menu option PREREC  
MODE in the RECORDING SETUP screen.  
(Page 141)  
• The following indications appear in the  
special recording display area in the  
viewfinder or LCD monitor.  
During recording: “P-REC” stays lit.  
During a pause: “P-PAUSE” stays lit.  
• “Screen displays” (Page 121)  
Set the time in the menu option INTERVAL  
TIME in the RECORDING SETUP screen.  
(Page 141)  
Press the START/STOP button.  
• The camera-recorder will repeat 1-frame  
recording for the time interval set in the  
INTERVAL TIME option.  
• Push the Operation lever in the direction  
(STOP) to stop recording.  
3
Press the START/STOP button.  
This setting will record audio and video a time  
period prior to start of recording.  
• The following recording modes will disable  
the pre-recording function and start  
respective recording function when selected.  
· Recording of video input via the IEEE1394  
connector  
To cancel this function, turn the camera-  
recorder off or select NORMAL in the REC  
FUNCTION option.  
• The following indications appear to the left of  
the operation status display.  
· When changing recording formats  
· After a change from playback to recording  
· During interval recording  
· During one-shot recording  
· During loop recording  
· During recording: “I-REC” stays lit.  
· During a pause: “I-PAUSE” stays lit.  
When a setting of less than 2 seconds is  
made in step 3, “I-REC” blinks according to  
time setting during recording.  
• There may be a short delay in start of audio  
and video recording when the START/STOP  
button is pressed directly after switching from  
thumbnail display or playback to view what  
you are shooting, after turning the power on  
and after changing the PREREC MODE.  
· When stopped: “I-” in “I-PAUSE” blinks.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
One-shot recording (ONE SHOT REC)  
The pre-recording and one-clip recording  
functions are not available.  
Sound is not recorded.  
This function records a single shot at each unit of  
time which has been set.  
Data recorded (until the stop recording) in  
this mode is recorded as a single file.  
There is no output from the DVCPRO/DV  
connector.  
1
Check that the SYSTEM SETUP screen is  
set up as described on page 43.  
• Refer to the section “Using the setup menus”  
(Page 28 of Vol. 1) for menu operation.  
2
3
4
Select ONE SHOT in the menu option REC  
FUNCTION in the RECORDING SETUP  
screen. (Page 141)  
Set the time in the menu option ONE SHOT  
TIME in the RECORDING SETUP screen.  
(Page 141)  
Press the START/STOP button.  
• The camera-recorder will pause recording  
after making a recording that lasts the  
duration set in step 3.  
• Push the Operation lever in the direction  
(STOP) to stop recording.  
To cancel this function, turn the camera-  
recorder off or select NORMAL in the REC  
FUNCTION option.  
• The following indications appear to the left of  
the operation status display.  
· During recording: “I-REC” stays lit.  
· During a pause: “I-PAUSE” stays lit.  
· When stopped: “I”- in “I-PAUSE” blinks.  
No other functions are available during  
operation.  
The pre-recording and one-clip recording  
functions are not available.  
Sound is not recorded.  
Data recorded (until the stop recording) in  
this mode is recorded as a single file.  
There is no output from the DVCPRO/DV  
connector.  
During continuous one-shot recording,  
recording operation speed may be  
decreased.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using special recording modes (continued)  
Loop recording (LOOP REC)  
Use two P2 cards with at least one minute  
• When two P2 cards are inserted in the P2 card  
slots, each card is recorded in succession.  
• When there is no longer any space left on the  
second cards, recording starts over from the first  
card by recording new clips over saved old clips.  
· “Splitting clips recorded on P2 cards” (Page 14)  
of remaining recording time.  
The mode check screen shows standard  
recording time depending on recording  
format as remaining P2 card time. When  
loop recording is stopped right after  
deleting old data, the time of recordings on  
the card may be shorter than indicated.  
This function is not available during  
IEEE1394 input.  
1st card  
2nd card  
Recorded  
Before  
starting loop  
recording  
No recording  
The pre-recording and one-clip recording  
functions are not available.  
Recording start  
First loop  
recording  
A
B
B
Canceling this function may take some  
time. The succeeding operations are not  
available until the P2 CARD ACCESS LED  
goes from blinking to steady lighting.  
During loop recording, the access LEDs  
for all P2 cards used in the recording light  
orange or blinks. Note that removing any of  
the P2 cards will terminate loop recording.  
Irregularity in the input GENLOCK reference  
signal during loop recording may terminate  
recording.  
Second loop  
recording  
C
Recording will be made on the areas with no  
recording consecutively (A, B, then C). When all  
areas on all cards are recorded, new recording  
(C) will be made by overwriting the area A.  
1
Check that the SYSTEM SETUP screen is  
set up as described on page 43.  
• Refer to the section “Using the setup menus”  
(Page 28 of Vol. 1) for menu operation.  
2
3
Select LOOP in the menu option REC  
FUNCTION in the RECORDING SETUP  
screen. (Page 141)  
Press the START/STOP button.  
• Recording starts.  
• Press the START/STOP button to stop  
recording.  
To cancel this function, turn the camera-  
recorder off or select NORMAL in the REC  
FUNCTION item.  
• The following indications appear to the left of  
the operation status display.  
· During recording: “L-REC” stays lit.  
· During a pause: “L-PAUSE” stays lit.  
· When remaining memory is low: “P2 LACK  
L-” blinks.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
One-clip recording (ONE CLIP REC)  
In addition to the aforementioned steps, the  
following ends combining to the clip and  
subsequent recordings use a new clip.  
· When the power is turned off  
· When the P2 card with the previous recording  
is removed  
Instead of creating a new clip for each recording  
session (i.e., operation from REC start to stop),  
this mode compiles images from multiple recording  
sessions into a single clip.  
· When the P2 card is formatted or the clip is  
deleted (when the previous combined clip  
does not exist)  
REC Start  
REC Start  
REC Start  
First  
Second  
Nth  
Recording  
Recording  
Recording*  
The clip does not stop combining even  
when the STOP button is pressed in the  
Menu or on the thumbnail display.  
REC stop  
REC stop  
REC stop  
To exit one-clip recording mode  
Single Combined Clip  
* Up to a maximum of 99 recordings can be  
combined into a single clip. When the 99th  
recording ends, recordings are no longer  
automatically combined into the same clip.  
Subsequent recordings are combined into a new  
clip.  
Set the menu option ONE CLIP REC to OFF.  
To cue to the start of the combined section of  
the clip  
A text memo can be automatically added to the  
start of the recording, the start of a section can  
be cued for playback, and the thumbnail of the  
location can be checked before each recording.  
To automatically add a text memo to the start point  
of the recording, set the menu option START TEXT  
MEMO to ON in the RECORDING SETUP screen.  
(Page 142)  
Check and playback the location of the added text  
memo by selecting THUMBNAIL → TEXT MEMO  
CLIPS from the Thumbnail Menu and moving the  
cursor over the desired clip.  
Refer to “Playing back a clip at the position where  
a text memo is recorded” (Page 83) for details.  
To cue to the location of the text memo during  
playback, set the menu option SEEK SELECT to  
CLIP&T in the OTHER FUNCTIONS screen, and  
push the Operation lever in the   direction  
while playback is paused.  
To use this function, set the menu option ONE  
CLIP REC to ON in the RECORDING SETUP  
screen. (Page 142)  
When one-clip recording mode is enabled, “1-CLIP”  
appears in the viewfinder and at the top of the LCD  
monitor.  
When you press the START/STOP button on  
the camera-recorder to start your first recording,  
“START 1CLIP” appears.  
Any subsequent recordings are automatically  
combined into the clip. Up to a maximum of 99  
clips can be combined into a single clip.  
To record a new clip  
Follow the instructions below to use a new and  
separate clip and end combining to the clip.  
• Push and hold the Operation lever in the   
direction (STOP) for about 2 seconds while  
recording is paused. (operating while recording is  
on standby)  
Or  
• Press and hold the START/STOP button for  
about 2 seconds to stop recording. (operating  
while recording is in progress)  
Follow the instructions above to end combining  
to the clip. “END 1-CLIP” displays. Subsequent  
recordings use a new and separate clip.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using special recording modes (continued)  
Precautions for one-clip recording mode  
• This mode will not function when the interval  
recording, one-shot recording, loop recording, or  
VFR recording functions are selected.  
• This mode will not function when the menu option  
REC SIGNAL is set to 1394.  
• The menu and thumbnail operations are restricted  
as follows when combining to the clip. Push  
and hold the Operation lever in the direction  
(STOP) for about 2 seconds to stop combining to  
the clip when switching to this mode.  
· The following menu items cannot be changed.  
SYSTEM MODE, REC SIGNAL,  
ASPECT CONV, CAMERA MODE,  
REC FORMAT, REC FUNCTION,  
25M REC CH SEL  
You can set VFR to ON even while  
continuing to link clips by using the SCENE  
FILE dial, SHTR/F.RATE dial, or the menu.  
When you do so, the compiling process is  
stopped, and a new clip will be created with  
each recording operation thereafter.  
· The following Menu items, related to the  
reading/ writing of the SD memory card and  
reading of the settings file, cannot be executed.  
LOAD/SAVE/INIT in SCENE FILE, all options  
in CARD FUNCTIONS, USER FILE and MENU  
INIT in OTHER FUNCTIONS  
· The following thumbnail menu items cannot be  
selected and executed.  
OPERATION→COPY  
• The processing time to complete the recording  
may take a little more time than normally to  
allow the clip to be combined with subsequent  
recordings.  
• The fade process does not work on discontinuous  
audio during playback where the recordings are  
combined within the clip.  
• If non-linear editing software is used on clips with  
multiple combined recordings, the software may  
not operate normally (as of Sep. 2011).  
For the latest information on software that has  
been confirmed to work with these types of clips,  
visit the support desk at the following website.  
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the shutter speed  
Shutter speed is set using the SHTR/F.RATE dial  
and DIAL SEL button.  
Setting SHUTTER mode  
As well as the shutter speed, you can use the  
SHTR/F.RATE dial to select settings for synchro  
scan and frame rate.  
1
2
Push DIAL SEL to select SHUTTER mode.  
Push the SHTR/F.RATE dial.  
• The SHUTTER mode changes ON/OFF.  
• The shutter speed changes by turning the  
SHTR/F.RATE dial in the shutter mode ON.  
(Page 50)  
Using SHTR/F.RATE dial  
• Remember that the faster the shutter speed,  
the lower the sensitivity.  
• It will take longer to focus when the shutter  
speed has been reduced so it is recommended  
that the unit be secured to a tripod, etc. for  
use.  
• The screen may be distorted when changing  
the SYNCHRO SCAN or SHUTTER setting.  
• Under fluorescent lighting and other discharge  
lighting systems, horizontal stripes may appear  
on the screen. Changing the shutter speed  
may correct this problem.  
• A subject that is captured when moving quickly  
across the field of view may appear distorted.  
This is due to the signal read out format of  
the image sensor (MOS sensor) and is not a  
malfunction.  
SHTR/F.RATE dial  
DIAL SEL button  
Press the SHUTTER button.  
• The function of the SHTR/F.RATE dial changes in  
the following order.  
SHUTTER → SYNCHRO SCAN →  
FRAME RATE → LOCK → SHUTTER →  
• SYNCHRO SCAN can be selected when the  
SHUTTER is set to SYNCHRO SCAN.  
SYNCHRO SCAN is displayed only when the  
SHUTTER is set to SYNCHRO SCAN.  
• FRAME RATE can be selected when the mode is  
1080i or 720P.  
• The red, blue and green dots that may appear  
on the screen at low shutter speeds (1/6 to  
1/15) do not indicate a malfunction.  
To prevent accidental operation, DIAL LOCK  
is automatically applied when no operation is  
performed for approximately 12 seconds.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the shutter speed (continued)  
If all modes and speeds are available, the display  
changes in the following order:  
Setting SYNCHRO SCAN mode  
1
Select SYNCHRO SCAN in the SHUTTER  
mode.  
• Turn the SHTR/F.RATE dial, the value  
displayed after 1/2000 is the current  
SYNCHRO SCAN setting value. Select this  
value.  
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-59.94i,  
720-59.94P, 480-59.94i  
For 60i and 60P recording  
S/S (1/15) (1/30) 1/60 1/100 1/120  
1/500 1/1000 1/2000  
1/250  
2
Press DIAL SEL button to select SYNCHRO  
SCAN function.  
For 30P recording  
S/S (1/7.5) (1/15) 1/60 1/100 1/120  
3
Turn the SHTR/F.RATE dial.  
• It is possible to set the SYNCHRO SCAN  
shatter speed.  
1/500 1/1000 1/2000  
1/250  
For 24P recording  
• The shatter speed is set higher by pushing  
and turning SHTR/F.RATE dial.  
S/S (1/6) (1/12) 1/60 1/100 1/120  
1/500 1/1000 1/2000  
1/250  
Range of variation in each mode  
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-59.94i,  
720-59.94P, 480-59.94i  
• The bracketed ( ) speeds cannot be selected  
when VFR is on.  
• 60P/60i mode:  
1/60.0 to 1/249.8  
1/30.0 to 1/249.8  
• 30P/30PN mode:  
• 24P/24PA/24PN mode:  
1/24.0 to 1/249.8  
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-50i,  
720-50P, 576-50i  
For 50i and 50P recording  
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-50i,  
720-50P, 576-50i  
S/S (1/12.5) (1/25) 1/50 1/60 1/120  
1/500 1/1000 1/2000  
1/250  
• 50P/50i mode:  
• 25P/25PN mode:  
1/50.0 to 1/250.0  
1/25.0 to 1/250.0  
For 25P recording  
Setting the menu option SYNC SCAN TYPE  
in the SCENE FILE screen to deg provides a  
guide to setting and displaying shutter angle.  
(Page 132)  
S/S (1/6.25) (1/12.5) 1/50 1/60 1/120  
1/500 1/1000 1/2000  
1/250  
• The bracketed ( ) speeds cannot be selected  
when VFR is on.  
• 3.0 d to 359.5 d  
• If SYSTEM MODE setting is changed, shutter  
speed may also be changed.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting FRAME RATE mode  
1
Press DIAL SEL button to select FRAME  
RATE function.  
When VFR is ON, the frame rate indicator on  
the viewfinder and LCD monitor flash as shown  
in the diagram below, indicating that you can  
alter the frame rate.  
3 0 : 2 4 PN  
.
A L CH 1  
2
CH 1  
CH 2  
• If they are not flashing, VFR mode is OFF.  
Press the SHTR/F.RATE dial to set VFR  
mode to ON.  
VFR mode switches between ON/OFF each  
time the SHTR/F.RATE dial is pressed.  
2
The FRAME RATE is set by turning the  
SHUTR/F.RATE dial.  
• If no operation is performed for approximately  
10 seconds, the frame rate indicator  
illuminates and the dial returns to a locked  
state.  
• The FRAME RATE mode can be set using  
FRAME RATE on the setting menu SCENE  
FILE screen.  
Use 1080i or 720P for the frame rate function.  
However, when 1080i is selected with DVCPRO  
HD recording, you cannot record unless  
CAMERA MODE is set to 60i (50i).  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Switching audio input  
INPUT1 LINE/MIC switch  
During shooting, you can record up to four  
channels of sound. You can also switch the input  
sound to be recorded on each of the channels to  
the built-in microphones, external microphones or  
audio equipment connected to camera-recorder.  
(See table below.)  
INPUT1 switch  
(MIC POWER +48V)  
INPUT2 LINE/MIC switch  
INPUT2 switch  
(MIC POWER +48V)  
CH1  
SELECT  
switch  
CH1 recording  
CH3 recording  
INT (L)  
INPUT1  
INPUT2  
Built-in microphone INPUT1 switch  
Lch  
selection is valid  
(LINE/MIC select)  
INPUT1 switch  
selection is valid  
(LINE/MIC select)  
Built-in microphone  
Lch  
INPUT2 switch  
selection is valid  
(LINE/MIC select)  
Built-in microphone  
Lch  
AUDIO CH2 SELECT switch  
AUDIO INPUT 1/2 terminal  
AUDIO CH1  
SELECT switch  
CH2  
SELECT  
switch  
CH2 recording  
CH4 recording  
INT (R)  
Built-in microphone INPUT2 switch  
Rch  
selection is valid  
(LINE/MIC select)  
INPUT2  
INPUT2 switch  
selection is valid  
(LINE/MIC select)  
Built-in microphone  
Rch  
Using the built-in microphone  
However, the following restrictions apply depending  
on the format used.  
• Refer to the section “Recording format list” (Page  
164) recording format.  
1
Switch the AUDIO CH1 SELECT switch to  
INT (L).  
• Audio from the built-in microphone Lch is  
recorded to audio channel 1.  
When the AVC-I100, AVC-I50, DVCPROHD or  
DVCPRO50 format is used:  
2
Switch the AUDIO CH2 SELECT switch to  
INT (R).  
The recording mode is fixed at 4-channel  
recording.  
• Audio from the built-in microphone Rch is  
recorded to audio channel 2.  
When the DVCPRO or DV format is used:  
Either 2 or 4 channels can be selected using 25M  
REC CH SEL on the setting menu AUDIO SETUP  
screen.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using another microphone and audio  
equipment  
• Select the input to be recorded on CH1 and  
CH3 with the AUDIO CH1 SELECT switch,  
and select the input to be recorded on CH2  
and CH4 with the AUDIO CH2 SELECT switch.  
(Page 52)  
• When inputting the microphone signal to  
channels 1 and 2, connect the microphone to  
AUDIO INPUT 2 and switch both AUDIO CH1  
SELECT and AUDIO CH2 SELECT to INPUT  
2.  
1
Connect an external microphone or audio  
equipment to the AUDIO INPUT 1/2 (XLR,  
3 pin) terminal. (Page 101)  
2
Use the INPUT 1/2 switch to switch the  
audio input.  
LINE:  
(audio equipment is connected)  
Input level is 0 dBu.  
MIC:  
Adjusting the audio recording level  
automatically  
(another microphone is connected)  
Input level is – 50 dBu.  
You can change the input level to – 40 dBu or  
– 60 dBu in the setup menus, RECORDING  
SETUP screen MIC GAIN1 and MIC GAIN2.  
(Page 144)  
Be aware that sensitivity will be higher if you  
choose – 60 dBu so you will record more  
noise.  
• When using an AG-MC200G (optional), set  
MIC GAIN to – 50 dBu.  
AUDIO AUTO/MANU CH1,  
CH2 switch  
When using the phantom microphone  
Set the INPUT 1/2 switch (MIC POWER  
+48 V) to ON.  
Set the AUDIO AUTO/MANU CH1 or CH2 switch  
to AUTO position.  
Adjust the audio signal recording level input  
through the built-in microphone and the AUDIO  
INPUT1/2 terminals (XLR, 3 pin) automatically.  
• CH1/CH2 can be set separately.  
• When AUTO is set, the recording level adjustment  
using the AUDIO LEVEL knob and the setting  
in the LIMITER CH1/LIMITER CH2 item of the  
setup menu AUDIO SETUP screen (Page 143) are  
disabled.  
ON:  
(When using the phantom microphone)  
+48V power supply to INPUT 1/2 terminal.  
OFF:  
(When a phantom microphone is not  
connected)  
No power supply for INPUT 1/2 terminal.  
• The battery will discharge faster if you  
use a phantom microphone.  
• Set to OFF if you connect equipment not  
compatible with +48V. You can damage  
such equipment if you leave the setting at  
ON.  
Since the audio signal recording level is  
adjusted automatically, the zoom operation  
sound may be recorded if zooming quickly,  
depending on the environment. In that case,  
adjust the audio recording level in manual  
mode.  
3
Select the input signal to be recorded on  
the tracks of audio channels 1 to 4.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Switching audio input (continued)  
Adjusting the recording level  
3
While checking the audio channel level  
meter in the display window or the audio  
level meter in the viewfinder, adjust the  
AUDIO LEVEL (CH1, CH2) control.  
• Note that if the level exceeds the top bar  
(0 dB), the word OVER illuminates to show  
that the input level is excessive. Adjust so  
that maximum sound levels do not reach the  
0 dB bar.  
CH 1  
CH 2  
AUDIO LEVEL knob (CH1, CH2)  
OVER indication  
Pressing the USER button to which the  
magnification of the audio level meters (MAG  
A.LVL) has been assigned magnifies the  
audio level meters.  
• “Audio level meter magnification” (Page 55)  
AUDIO AUTO/MANU CH1,  
CH2 switch  
• The CH1 and CH2 characters are highlighted  
(they will appear in white text) when INT MIC on  
the AUDIO SETUP screen is set to ON.  
Use the AUDIO LEVEL knob to adjust the recording  
level of the built-in microphone or of audio signals  
input through the AUDIO INPUT 1/2 (XLR, 3 pin)  
terminal.  
To adjust the volume of the sound for monitoring,  
see “Adjusting the volume while shooting” (Page  
40).  
C
H 1  
C
H 1  
C
H 2  
C
H 2  
INT MIC ON  
INT MIC OFF  
Check the recording level prior to shooting.  
• The recording level is set higher than for  
Panasonic’s broadcast-use camera-recorder  
recorders (AJ series, AG-HPX500, 370 or 300  
series).  
To adjust the recording levels for Audio Channels 1  
and 2, follow the steps below.  
1
Set AUDIO OUT on the setting menu AUDIO  
SETUP screen to CH1/CH2 and confirm that  
the display is 1, 2, so that the audio level  
meter display indicates CH1, CH2.  
2
Position the AUDIO AUTO/MANU CH1, CH2  
switch at MANU.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(Only for AG-HPX250EN)  
CH3 and CH4 recording levels  
T C 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6 : 2 3  
1 2 1 9 9 9 min  
Conditions and input levels set in the menu options  
AUTO LEVEL CH3 and the AUTO LEVEL CH4 in  
the AUDIO SETUP screen change the operation  
of the audio level of channels 3 and 4 as shown  
below. These functions cannot be manually  
adjusted.  
P 2  
1394  
F U L L  
P - P AUS E 1 - C L I P  
US ER - 1  
F BC  
1 0 8 0 i  
AVC-I 100  
60  
P 3.2K  
L T . BOX  
0
dB  
ND 1 / 1 6  
Each option can be selected in the AUDIO SETUP  
screen.  
INT L. : CH 1  
INT R : CH 2  
-30  
-18 -12  
-6  
0
dB  
LIMITER CH3 (CH4)  
AUTO LEVEL  
CH3 (CH4)  
ON  
OFF  
2
1
3
4
5
LIMITER OFF  
AGC* ON  
LIMITER OFF  
AGC ON  
ON  
1
2
Channel display  
This displays the currently monitored audio  
channel.  
LIMITER ON  
AGC OFF  
LIMITER OFF  
AGC OFF  
OFF  
* AGC: Auto Gain Control  
Input system display  
Displays the input system for the audio channel  
currently in use.  
Audio level meter magnification  
OFF (Built-in microphone selected and  
switched off)  
INT L, R (Built-in microphone selected)  
XLR1, XLR2 (INPUT 1, 2 selected)  
Press USER button to which MAG A. LVL has been  
assigned to display a magnification of the audio  
level meter (available also when LEVEL METER in  
the DISPLAY SETUP menu is set to OFF).  
Press the button again to return to normal audio  
level meter size.  
Turning on MODE CHECK during audio level meter  
magnification clears the audio level meter display.  
After MODE CHECK use, the audio level meter  
reappears at normal size.  
3
Standard level bar  
(Only for AG-HPX250P)  
Displayed at –20 dB and –12 dB.  
(Only for AG-HPX250EN)  
Displayed at –18 dB and –12 dB.  
4
5
Peak hold display  
Holds the audio peak level indication for  
1 second.  
• “Using the USER buttons” (Page 39)  
(Only for AG-HPX250P)  
Excessive level indicator  
Displayed in red when the audio level exceeds  
0 dB.  
T C 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6 : 2 3  
1 2 1 9 9 9 min  
P 2  
1394  
F U L L  
P - P AUS E 1 - C L I P  
US ER - 1  
F BC  
1 0 8 0 i  
AVC-I 100  
60  
P 3.2K  
L T . BOX  
0
dB  
ND 1 / 1 6  
INT L. : CH 1  
INT R : CH 2  
-30  
-20  
-12  
-6  
0
dB  
2
1
3
4
5
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using scene files (Scene File Data)  
Each position of the SCENE FILE dial stores  
Changing scene file settings  
settings for specific shooting situations.  
When shooting, you can retrieve the necessary file  
instantly using scene file dial.  
Example 1: Change the name of the scene  
file.  
1
2
SCENE FILE dial  
Turn the scene file dial, then select the  
scene file to be changed.  
Select the menu option NAME EDIT in  
the SCENE FILE screen, then press the  
Operation lever in the ▲ ▼ direction.  
• For details on menu operation, refer to “Using  
the setup menus” (Page 28 of Vol. 1).  
SCENE FILE F3:SPARK  
GAMMA  
HD NORM  
AUTO  
KNEE  
• Note that changing scene files during recording  
will not change VFR and frame rate settings.  
To make such changes, set it on recording  
standby status.  
MATRIX  
NORM1  
OFF  
SKIN TONE DTL  
V DETAIL FREQ  
NAME EDIT  
THIN  
PUSH MENU TO RETURN  
Factory setting  
F1 (SCENE)  
File suitable for normal shooting.  
F2 (SCENE FLUO.)  
File suitable for shooting under fluorescent lights,  
ie. indoors.  
3
4
Press SET on the Operation lever (or push  
it in the ► direction), then push it in the ▼  
direction, select CHANGE, and press SET  
once again.  
SCENE FILE F3:SPARK  
GAMMA  
HD NORM  
AUTO  
KNEE  
F3 (SCENE SPARK)  
MATRIX  
NORM1  
OFF  
SKIN TONE DTL  
V DETAIL FREQ  
NAME EDIT  
File suitable for SD shooting with a greater range  
of resolution, coloring and contrast.  
F4 (SCENE B-STR)  
File for increasing the contrast of dark areas,  
such as when shooting sunsets.  
F5 (SCENE CINE V)  
File suitable for shooting movie-like scenes  
where the contrast is to be emphasized.  
F6 (SCENE CINE D)  
THIN  
RETURN  
CHANGE  
PUSH MENU TO RETURN  
Set the filename with 6 characters by using  
Operation lever when the screen below is  
displayed.  
▼: Character shift  
File suitable for shooting movie-like scenes  
where the dynamic range is to be emphasized.  
◄ ►: Character selection  
SET: Character fix  
• Characters that can be set  
space (□) → alphabet (A to Z)  
→ numerics (0 to 9)  
→ symbols (; : < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^_-./).  
• If the RESET button is pressed when the  
filename has been set, the characters are  
Changes to scene files do not affect SYSTEM  
MODE settings. Use the SYSTEM SETUP  
screen to make such changes.  
cleared.  
NAME EDIT  
SW POSITION F3  
S P A R K  
PUSH MENU TO RETURN  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Pressing the MENU button fixes the current  
settings and closes NAME EDIT.  
• Values that have been fixed are maintained  
even if the power is switched OFF or the  
dial is changed. The settings for all items in  
scene files are also maintained in the same  
way.  
SAVE  
COMPLETED !  
• After changing the scene file settings, to return  
to the settings to the previously saved values,  
select LOAD in step 2 and perform the operation  
described in step 3.  
Example 2: Save the F1 scene file to the  
camera-recorder.  
To return the scene file settings to their factory  
defaults, select INITIAL in step 2 and perform the  
operation described in step 3.  
1
Select the menu option LOAD/SAVE/INIT in  
the SCENE FILE screen, then press the SET  
button on the Operation lever.  
To save and read user file settings or return them  
to their factory defaults, open the setting menu  
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen and run USER FILE  
in the same way as when handling scene files.  
• Comfirm SCENE FILE F3 display or not.  
• For details on menu operation, refer to “Using  
the setup menus” (Page 28 of Vol. 1).  
SCENE FILE F3: SPARK  
LOAD SAVE INIT  
VFR  
RETURN  
LOAD  
FRAME RATE  
SYNC SCAN TYPE  
(SYNCHRO SCAN)  
DETAIL LEVEL  
V DETAIL LEVEL  
DETAIL CORING  
SAVE  
INITIAL  
0
0
0
0
PUSH MENU TO RETURN  
2
3
Select SAVE and press the SET button on  
the Operation lever.  
SCENE FILE F3: SPARK  
LOAD SAVE INIT  
VFR  
RETURN  
LOAD  
FRAME RATE  
SYNC SCAN TYPE  
(SYNCHRO SCAN)  
DETAIL LEVEL  
V DETAIL LEVEL  
DETAIL CORING  
SAVE  
INITIAL  
0
0
0
0
PUSH MENU TO RETURN  
Select YES when the screen below is  
displayed, and press SET on the Operation  
lever.  
To return to the menu level above, press the  
MENU button.  
FILE F3: SPARK  
SAVE ?  
YES  
NO  
PUSH SET (  
)
• “PROCESSING” appears and the following  
message is shown when all settings have  
been completed.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using scene files (Scene File Data) (continued)  
Saving scene files and other settings  
4
Push the Operation lever in the ▲ ▼  
direction, and select file number (1 to 4).  
on SD memory cards  
• Press the SET button again to confirm the  
setting.  
You can save up to four scene file settings or other  
settings as files on an SD memory card, and you  
can also load them from the card.  
SCENE FILE (SD CARD)  
FILE SELECT  
READ  
1
>>>  
>>>  
NO FILE  
NO FILE  
NO FILE  
NO FILE  
>>>  
• Current scene file settings are automatically  
saved in the camera-recorder and written to an  
SD memory card. When data has been read  
from an SD memory card, the current settings  
are rewritten at the same time as the data saved  
inside the unit.  
WRITE  
FILE1  
FILE2  
FILE3  
FILE4  
TITLE RELOAD  
PUSH MENU TO RETURN  
• The data in all the scene files, F1 to F6, is  
rewritten.  
• Be sure to read <Cautions in using SD memory  
cards> (Page 162) regarding SD memory handling.  
5
6
Select WRITE EXECUTE with the  
Operation lever, and press SET.  
SCENE FILE (SD CARD)  
FILE SELECT  
READ  
1
>>>  
RETURN  
EXECUTE  
NO FILE  
NO FILE  
NO FILE  
>>>  
WRITE  
FILE1  
The following procedure shows how to save scene  
files.  
FILE2  
FILE3  
FILE4  
TITLE RELOAD  
1
2
Set the POWER/MODE switch to ON.  
PUSH MENU TO RETURN  
Select SCENE FILE from the setting menu  
CARD FUNCTIONS screen, and press SET  
on the Operation lever (or push it in the ►  
direction).  
Push the Operation lever in the ◄ direction  
and select YES when the screen below is  
displayed, and press SET.  
• In the following example, TITLE 1 is the  
filename.  
• For details on menu operation, refer to “Using  
the setup menus” (Page 28 of Vol. 1).  
• When writing is completed, WRITE OK  
appears.  
CARD FUNCTIONS  
SCENE FILE  
USER FILE  
SD CARD FORMAT  
>>>  
>>>  
>>>  
SCENE FILE (SD CARD)  
WRITE FILE 1  
YES  
PUSH SET (  
)
NO  
TITLE EDIT  
TITLE 1  
PUSH MENU TO RETURN  
PUSH MENU TO RETURN  
3
Select CHANGE, and press SET on the  
Operation lever, (or push it in the ►  
direction).  
• Select the menu option USER FILE for other  
settings.  
To load a file  
Perform steps 1 to 4. Select READ in step 5, select  
EXECUTE and press the SET button on the  
Operation lever. READ OK appears when loading  
completes.  
Like scene files, process user files by using the  
menu option USER FILE in the CARD FUNCTION  
screen.  
CARD FUNCTIONS  
SCENE FILE  
USER FILE  
SD CARD FORMAT  
RETURN  
CHANGE  
>>>  
Reloading Files From an SD Memory Card  
Perform steps 1 to 3, move to TITLE RELOAD so  
that YES is displayed in step 5, and press the SET  
button on the Operation lever. The file is reloaded.  
PUSH MENU TO RETURN  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To title a file  
1
2
Perform steps 1 to 5.  
Set the filename with 8 characters by using  
Operation lever.  
▼: Character shift  
◄ ►: Character selection  
SET: Character fix  
• Characters that can be set  
space (□) → alphabet (A to Z)  
→ numerics (0 to 9)  
→ symbols (; : < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^_-./).  
• If the RESET button is pressed when the  
filename has been set, the characters are  
cleared.  
START/  
DATE/ PHOTO  
TIME SHOT  
STOP  
OSD  
COUNTER RESET TITLE  
MULTI/  
ZOOM  
P-IN-P  
REC A.DUB  
/REW PLAY  
3
After input is complete, at the left end of the  
characters push the Operation lever in the ◄  
direction (or in the direction from the right  
end of the characters) to select YES and press  
SET.  
• If WRITE NG FORMAT ERROR appears,  
format the SD memory card. (Page 16)  
• If WRITE NG WRITE PROTECT appears,  
change the lock tab position to enable writing.  
• If WRITE NG CANNOT ACCESS appears, quit  
all other operations (such as playback) before  
proceeding.  
• If WRITE NG ERROR appears, the SD  
memory card may be defective. Replace it.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using scene files (Scene File Data) (continued)  
Configuration of setup data files  
This camera makes it possible to save a scene file to each of the F1 to F6 positions on the SCENE FILE  
dial.  
Use of an SD memory card makes it possible to save up to four of the F1 to F6 files on an SD card for later  
retrieval.  
The setting menu values can be stored as a user file in the camera-recorder and up to four files can be  
stored on the SD memory card.  
The setting data files are configured as shown below.  
AG-HPX250P/AG-HPX250EN  
SD CARD  
SCENE FILE  
(Factory defaults)  
SCENE FILE  
(Current operating status values)  
SCENE FILE  
(Saved camera values)  
SCENE FILE  
(SD CARD)  
F1  
F1 Default value  
F2 Default value  
F3 Default value  
F4 Default value  
F5 Default value  
F6 Default value  
F1 Current value  
F1 Saved value  
F2 Saved value  
F3 Saved value  
F4 Saved value  
F5 Saved value  
F6 Saved value  
SCENE FILE  
screen INTIAL *1  
SCENE FILE screen  
LOAD/SAVE *1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SCENE  
FILE 1  
F2 Current value  
F3 Current value  
F4 Current value  
F5 Current value  
F6 Current value  
SCENE  
FILE 2  
SCENE  
FILE 3  
*1: SCENE FILE dial unit  
*2: All files F1 to F6  
CARD FUNCTIONS screen  
SCENE FILE LOAD/SAVE *2  
SCENE  
FILE 4  
USER FILE  
(Factory defaults)  
USER FILE  
(Current operating status values)  
USER FILE  
(Saved camera values)  
USER FILE  
(SD CARD)  
USER FILE initial value  
USER FILE1  
Current USER FILE values  
Saved USER FILE values  
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen  
USER FILE INTIAL  
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen  
USER FILE LOAD/SAVE  
USER FILE2  
USER FILE3  
USER FILE4  
CARD FUNCTIONS screen  
USER FILE LOAD/SAVE  
Running the menu option MENU INIT in the OTHER FUNCTIONS screen returns all current  
operating status values and saved camera-recorder values in the F1 to F6 scene files as well as  
in the user file to their factory defaults. This function does not return the TIMEZONE setting to  
its factory default.  
SCENE FILE and USER FILE settings cannot be operated when recordings can be compiled to  
a previous clip in one-clip recording mode (i.e., when “1 CLIP” is displayed). After closing the  
menu, push the Operation lever in the ▼ direction (STOP) for approximately 2 seconds, and try  
once more after ending clip linking.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using time data  
The camera-recorder provides time data such as  
time codes, user bits, time of day (real-time) data,  
which is recorded on each frame alongside video  
data. It is also recorded as as data in clip metadata  
files.  
Time data overview  
Time code  
Use the TCG switch to select Rec Run or Free Run  
mode. (Page 141)  
FREE RUN:  
The time code advances constantly whether the  
camera-recorder is on or not just like time itself.  
Recording using a slave-locked time code input  
to the TC IN/OUT or DVCPRO/DV connectors is  
also possible.  
Counter setting and display  
Pressing the COUNTER button to view the counter  
displays the counter value on the time code  
indicator in the LCD and in the viewfinder. (Page 121)  
The counter value is indicated in “Hour : Minute .  
Second” format. The counter value is not displayed  
during playback.  
The menu option REC COUNTER in the DISPLAY  
SETUP screen can be set to display two types of  
counters. (Page 149)  
REC RUN:  
The time code advances only during recording.  
This will enable continuation of time codes in  
previously recorded clips and when the power  
is turned off or new P2 cards are inserted to  
continue recording.  
TOTAL:  
The following events will disrupt time code  
continuity.  
When clips are deleted  
When a 24P or 24PA frame rate is selected  
When 24PN or 30PN (25PN) is selected  
When a recording is interrupted by a REC  
WARNING or other abnormality  
provides a continuous count until reset by  
pressing the COUNTER RESET button. The  
counter value is retained when P2 cards are  
replaced and when the power is turned off.  
CLIP:  
The counter is reset to 0 at the start of each  
recording and allows you to keep track of clip  
recording time while shooting the current clip.  
User bits  
• Two types of user bits are provided internally:  
(LTC UB: recorded as LTC, output via the TC IN/  
OUT connector as LTC embedded in HD SDI)  
and VITC (in DVCPRO recorded in the VIDEO  
AUX area and output as VITC embedded in HD  
SDI).  
• LTC UB enables the recording of user settings,  
time, date, time codes and similar values, the  
frame rate data for camera capture and external  
input values (via TC IN/OUT or DVCPRO/DV  
connector input).  
Pressing the RESET button when the  
counter value is displayed resets the  
counter to 0.  
The counter value indicates values in  
the range between 0:00.00 and 9:59.59 in  
1-second steps.  
• VITC user bits record the frame rate data of  
camera capture.  
• The user bits in clip metadata record the LTC UB  
value at the start of recording.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using time data (continued)  
Date (real time)  
• A slave relationship, once started, continues even  
after input from the TC IN/OUT or DVCPRO/DV  
connector ends. Note that the following events  
release user bit slave status.  
· When a UB MODE option is set to something  
other than EXT.  
• The built-in clock calculates the year, month, day  
and time from the internal clock to display on  
video in the LCD, viewfinder and VIDEO OUT  
and other video output.  
• The internal clock is not only used to calculate  
the free run time code when the power is off and  
to set the user bit year, date and time, but also  
to set file creation dates when clips are recorded  
that determine the order of thumbnails and  
playback order.  
· When UB PRESET is performed  
· When switching to 1394 in the menu option  
REC SIGNAL in the SYSTEM SETUP screen.  
· Turning the power off.  
• The internal user value retains the slave values  
even after slave release.  
• It is also used for generating clip metadata and  
UMID (Unique Material Identifier).  
· “Setting the calendar” (Page 26 of Vol. 1)  
To input an external time code from the TC  
IN/OUT terminal, it is necessary to set TC IN/  
OUT SEL on the setting menu OUTPUT SEL  
screen to TC IN.  
Setting user bits  
Use the setting menu UB MODE on the  
RECORDING SETUP screen to select the user bits  
to record in the subcode area. (Page 142)  
USER:  
Records internal user values. To set user values,  
set the menu UB PRESET screen. Set values are  
retained after the power is turned off.  
• “Entering the user bits” (Page 63)  
TIME:  
Records the time calculated by the internal clock.  
DATE:  
Records the year, month and day time digits from  
the internal clock.  
EXT:  
Records the user bits input to the TC IN/OUT  
connector.  
Recording of 1394 input also records user bits  
input to the DVCPRO/DV connector.  
TCG:  
Records the time code value.  
FRM. RATE:  
Records the frame rate information of camera  
capture.  
A native recorded clip is played back at the  
same frame rate as the VITC UB regardless of  
recorded values. Use this setting when a PC or  
other editing device is to use the user bit frame  
rate.  
• “Frame rate information recorded in user bits”  
(Page 64)  
To slave lock to the user bits input to the TC IN/  
OUT connector, set to EXT.  
• In slave mode, the UB indicator is highlighted.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entering the user bits  
3
Use Operation lever to set the user bits.  
UB PRESET  
The user bits allow information, including memos  
that use up to eight-digit hexadecimal numbers  
(date and time), to be recorded in the Subcode  
area.  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
+/- : PUSH  
SEL : PUSH  
/
/
PRESET : PUSH SET  
PUSH MENU TO RETURN  
direction: Shifts the target (highlighted)  
digit to the right.  
direction: Shifts the target (highlighted)  
digit to the left.  
RESET button  
direction: Increases the highlighted number  
by one.  
direction: Decreases the highlighted  
number by one.  
COUNTER button  
MENU button  
Operation lever  
SET:  
Confirms the set user bits.  
• Pressing the RESET button while setting the  
user bits will reset any user bit setting to 0.  
4
5
Press SET on the Operation lever and  
confirm the user’s bit setting value and you  
leave the user’s bit setting screen.  
1
2
Open the setting menu RECORDING SETUP  
screen and set the menu option UB MODE  
to USER.  
• For details on menu operation, refer to “Using  
the setup menus” (Page 28 of Vol. 1).  
You can also use the corresponding buttons  
on the remote control. For details, see  
“Description of parts” (Remote control).  
(Page 19 of Vol. 1)  
If you leave the user’s bit setting screen  
without pressing SET on the Operation  
lever, the set value is not retained.  
Use the COUNTER button to display the UB  
and confirm that the value set is displayed.  
Select CHANGE for UB PRESET on the  
setting menu RECORDING SETUP screen  
and press SET on the Operation lever to  
open the User’s Bit setting screen.  
Retaining the user bits  
The data set for the user bits are automatically  
saved and retained even if the video camera-  
recorder is turned off.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using time data (continued)  
Frame rate information recorded in user bits  
The frame rate value of video data captured and  
recorded at a frame rate set in the menu option  
FRAME RATE or other options in the SYSTEM  
SETUP screen can be recorded in the user bits and  
be used in editing equipment (personal computer  
editing software).  
1080i, 480i, 576i mode  
Frame rate: 24P over 60i (2:3)  
First field of updated frame rate  
Time code digit  
00 01 02 03 04 05 06  
23 24 25 26 27 28 29  
Co De Do De Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De  
Video  
This type of data is recorded in VITC UB at all  
times.  
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co De Do De Ao Ae Bo Be  
Sequence No.  
Setting the setting menu UB MODE to FRM RATE,  
records the information also to the user bits.  
The same value as in the frame rate information  
obtained from VITC UB playback is also output as  
LTC UB during playback of clips recorded in native  
format.  
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
Updated frame information  
10 10 01 01 00 10 10  
01 00 10 10 01 01 00  
Frame rate: 24PA over 60i (2:3:3:2)  
Time code digit  
Frame rate information  
Frame rate, video pull-down and time code user  
bits are related as described below.  
00 01 02 03 04 05 06  
23 24 25 26 27 28 29  
Video  
Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co Ce Do De Ao Ae Bo Be  
Co Ce Do De Ao Ae Bo Be Bo Ce Co Ce Do De  
Sequence No.  
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
Updated frame information  
10 10 01 00 10 10 10  
00 10 10 10 01 00 10  
Verification  
information  
on the right-  
hand  
Fixed  
value  
Media management  
data  
• Update frame flag,  
active frame flag  
• REC mark  
Frame rate: 30P over 60i (2:2)  
25P over 50i (2:2)  
Time code digit  
six digits  
Sequence No.  
24P, 24PA: 0-4 Other than  
above: locked at F  
Camera capture mode  
Example:  
00 01 02  
Video  
Ao Ae Bo Be Co Ce  
· 60i: 600  
· 60P: 608  
Updated frame information  
10 10 10  
· 30P: 308  
· 24P: 248  
· 24PA: 24C  
· 24PN: 24C (recording)  
· 50i: 502  
· 50P: 50A  
· 25P: 25A  
· P: 9 (VFR 30PN or over 60P)  
· P: 1 (VFR over 60P)  
· P: D (VFR 24PN recording)  
· P: B (VFR 25PN or over 50P)  
· P: 3 (VFR over 50i)  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
720P mode  
Frame rate: 24P over 60P (2:3)  
Updated frame  
Time code digit  
00 01 02 03 04 05 06  
23 24 25 26 27 28 29  
Video  
A
A
B
B
B
C
C
D
D
D
A
A
B
B
C
D
D
D
A
A
B
B
B
C
C
D
D
D
Updated frame information  
10 10 01 01 00 10 10  
01 00 10 10 01 01 00  
Frame rate: 30P over 60P (2:2)  
25P over 50P (2:2)  
Time code digit  
00 01 02  
Video  
A
A
B
B
C
C
Updated frame information  
10 10 10  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using time data (continued)  
Setting the time code  
4
5
Press SET on the Operation lever and  
confirm the time code setting value and  
you leave the time code setting screen.  
1
Switch the menu option TC MODE and TCG  
on the RECORDING SETUP screen to set  
the mode of the time code.  
TC MODE (in the case of 59.94 Hz) (Page  
141)  
Select TC display using the COUNTER  
button, and confirm that the value set is  
displayed.  
Sets DF/NDF.  
Time code  
Drop frame mode  
Non-drop frame mode  
Setting  
When 24P or 24PA is used, the time  
code is adjusted every 5 frames. It is  
adjusted to multiples of four for 24PN  
and to even numbers for 720/30PN. It  
is adjusted so that the seconds plus  
the frames are an even number for  
720/25PN. The time code cannot be set  
during recording.  
DF  
NDF  
24P, 24PA, and 24PN always operate using  
NDF.  
TCG (Page 141)  
Sets FREE RUN/REC RUN.  
If you leave the time code setting  
screen without pressing the SET button  
on the Operation lever, the set value is  
not retained.  
2
3
Select CHANGE for TC PRESET on the  
setting menu RECORDING SETUP screen  
and press SET on the Operation lever to  
open the time code setting screen.  
Use the Operation lever to set the time  
code.  
• Range of available time code settings:  
00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:29 (60i, 60P),  
00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:23 (24PN),  
00:00:00:00 to 23:59:59:24 (50i, 50P)  
Time code function during battery replacement  
Even during battery replacement the backup  
mechanism keeps the time code generator  
functioning.  
When the POWER/MODE switch has been  
switched ON → OFF → ON, the backup  
accuracy of the time code in free run mode is  
about ±2 frames.  
TC PRESET  
REC RUN  
00 h 00 m 00 s 00  
h
min  
s
frm  
+/- : PUSH  
SEL : PUSH  
/
/
VFR (variable frame rate) time code  
PRESET : SET (  
)
PUSH MENU TO RETURN  
• In 24PN mode, recording is performed at  
24-frame time code, and output is performed at  
30-frame time code to match the 2:3 pull-down  
scheme used for video output.  
direction: Shifts the target (highlighted)  
digit to the right.  
direction: Shifts the target (highlighted)  
digit to the left.  
direction: Increases the highlighted  
number by one.  
direction: Decreases the highlighted  
number by one.  
• At a frame rate (capture frame rate) of 24P in  
24PN mode, the speed of recording and the  
output time code matches actual time, but not  
at any speed other than 24P. (Example: at 60P  
recording progresses at 60/24 speed)  
• Then the camera-recorder operates in REC  
RUN mode and the time code output at start of  
recording matches the recording time code.  
• This is also the same when shooting in modes  
other than 30P in 30PN, and 25P in 25PN.  
SET:  
Use to confirm set time code value.  
• Pressing the RESET button will reset any  
time code setting to 0.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example 2: Connecting two or more AG-  
HPX250P/EN with one another, with one  
being used as the reference device.  
Externally locking the time code  
The time code generator built into your AG-  
HPX250P/EN may be locked to an external  
generator. It is also possible to lock an external  
time code generator to the internal generator.  
Reference device  
Slave device  
Connections for externally locking the time  
code (examples)  
As illustrated, both the reference video signals and  
the time code must be input.  
TC OUT  
TC IN  
Example 1: Locking the time code to external  
signals  
VIDEO OUT  
GENLOCK IN  
AG-HPX250P/EN  
Set TC IN/OUT terminal to output or input  
using TC IN/OUT SEL on the setting menu  
OUTPUT SEL screen.  
TC IN  
Reference time  
code  
For each unit, set TC VIDEO SYNC on  
the setting menu OUTPUT SEL screen to  
RECORDING, and GL PHASE on the OTHER  
FUNCTIONS screen to COMPOSITE.  
If you set TC VIDEO SYNC on the setting  
menu OUTPUT SEL screen to RECORDING,  
you can attach the same time code to  
synchronized video on two units when  
recording.  
GENLOCK IN  
Reference video  
signal  
To input an external time code, set TC IN/  
OUT SEL on the setting menu OUTPUT  
SEL screen to TC IN, and TCG on the  
RECORDING SETUP screen to FREE RUN.  
In addition to an HD Y reference signal, a  
composite video signal can also be input  
as reference signal.  
The subcarrier in the VBS signal of the  
VIDEO OUT connector of the camera-  
recorder cannot be externally locked.  
Input composite video signals when the  
system mode is 480i (576i) (SD) and 720P.  
During HD-Y signal input in 720P system  
mode, GENLOCK input for the video signal  
is applied but the time code is delayed by 1  
field.  
If the reference GENLOCK input signal  
becomes irregular and recording cannot be  
normally performed, “TEMPORARY PAUSE  
IRREGULAR FRM SIG” blinks in red in the  
viewfinder and on the LCD screen and the  
current clip is divided. The continuity of the  
time code cannot be guaranteed. Recording  
resumes when the signal returns to normal.  
Recording will not resume if interval, one-  
shot or loop recording is in progress.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using time data (continued)  
To externally lock the time code  
Follow the steps below.  
Setting the user bits when the time code is  
externally locked  
To externally lock user bits, set the setting menu  
UB MODE (RECORDING SETUP screen) to EXT.  
Regardless of an FREE RUN or REC RUN setting,  
the time code is slaved to user bit values input to  
the TC IN/OUT connector.  
1
2
Turn the POWER/MODE switch to ON.  
Set TCG on the setting menu RECORDING  
SETUP screen to FREE RUN.  
• “Time data overview” (Page 61) ·  
“Setting user bits” (Page 62)  
3
4
Use the COUNTER button to set TC display.  
Supply a phase-relationship reference  
time code (that conforms to the time  
code requirements) and reference video  
signals to the TC IN/OUT and GENLOCK IN  
connectors, respectively.  
To unlock the externally locked time code  
Discontinue external time code supply, then set the  
setting menu TCG (RECORDING SETUP screen)  
to REC RUN.  
External synchronisation of the camera when  
the time code is externally locked  
• Now the built-in time code generator is locked to  
the reference time code.  
When the time code is externally locked, the  
reference video signals input through the  
GENLOCK IN connector gen-lock the camera.  
• When locked to an external time code generator,  
the time code is at all times locked to the external  
time code, which is displayed as a highlighted  
value on the counter indicator. Do not engage the  
recording mode during the few seconds it takes  
for the sync generator to stabilize.  
• Once a slave relationship is established, the TC  
IN/OUT and GENLOCK IN connectors stay in  
slave status.*  
To lock other devices externally to the AG-  
HPX250P/EN, as the master device, make  
sure that the other devices are in the same  
camera mode as the AG-HPX250P/EN. Note  
that if some of the connected devices use  
interlaced scanning while other devices use  
progressive scanning, there may be breaks  
in the video and time code.  
· When TC PRESET is performed.  
· When the REC SIGNAL option in the SYSTEM  
SETUP screen is set to 1394.  
· The power is turned off.  
· The time code mode is switched.  
· The TCG switch is set to R-RUN.  
· When REC FORMAT and CAMERA MODE  
have been switched.  
* The slave function is a state whereby the  
unit’s internal time code generator is locked  
to and progresses with an externally input  
time code, and continues to progress after  
input of the external time code has stopped.  
When 24P, 24PA or 24PN (native) is selected  
and the time code is externally locked, be  
sure to select a non-drop frame time code.  
The time code cannot be externally locked  
when drop frame mode is selected. When  
the time code is externally locked, the  
video may be distorted, but this is because  
of adjustment to 5-frame segments and not  
a malfunction.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENLOCK and time code input/output connection and setup  
GENLOCK input and camera-recorder  
output phase  
Camera-  
Camera-recorder operating conditions  
recorder setup  
(In phase: √ Out of phase: ×)  
Video and reference  
Recording  
format  
VIDEO OUT,  
SDI OUT (SD)  
signal to be output  
externally  
GENLOCK input  
GL PHASE  
SDI OUT (HD)  
TC OUT  
SDI OUT (1080i)  
VIDEO OUT  
HD SDI  
COMPOSITE  
HD SDI  
90H delay  
×
×
1080i  
90H advance  
1080i  
SDI OUT (1080i)  
VIDEO OUT  
90H delay  
SD (480i/576i)  
720P  
COMPOSITE  
HD SDI  
90H advance  
SDI OUT (720P)  
VIDEO OUT  
120H delay  
COMPOSITE  
HD SDI  
120H advance  
720P  
SDI OUT (720P)  
VIDEO OUT  
120H delay  
SD (480i/576i)  
SD (480i/576i)  
COMPOSITE  
120H advance  
SDI OUT (480i/576i)  
VIDEO OUT  
480i/576i  
Disabled  
No output  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using time data (continued)  
Outputting the time code externally  
To output time code from the camera-recorder’s TC  
OUT connector to a VTR or other recording device  
in sync with camera-recorder picture or playback  
picture, set the setting menu TC VIDEO SYNC  
(OUTPUT SEL) to VIDEO OUT.  
Set the menu option GL SELECT to HD SDI or  
COMPOSITE as required by supplied video output  
in the OTHER FUNCTIONS screen and the menu  
option TC OUT to TCG/TCR in the OUTPUT SEL  
screen.  
AG-HPX250P/EN  
TC OUT  
SDI OUT or VIDEO OUT  
TC IN  
VIDEO IN  
SDI IN  
VTR, etc.  
HD SDI IN  
When the setting menu TC VIDEO SYNC is  
set to VIDEO OUT, the time code is output via  
TC IN/OUT in tune with VIDEO OUT delay.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording time codes and user bits  
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-59.94i, 720-59.94P, 480-59.94i  
Displayed  
TC  
System setting status  
Recorded TC  
Output TC  
Recorded UB  
Output UB  
LTC UB  
LTC and  
VITC  
TC IN/OUT  
VITC UB  
SYSTEM  
MODE  
REC  
SIGNAL  
CAMERA  
FRAME  
RATE  
TC tc (24/30  
embedded conversion)  
in HD SDI  
REC FORMAT  
LTC  
VITC  
TC OUT  
LTC UB  
VITC UB  
connector embedded embedded  
MODE  
UB*1  
in HD SDI*1 in HD SDI  
R-RUN/F-RUN*3  
DF/NDF  
30 frames  
60i, 30P  
(60i)  
1 to 30  
FRAME  
Outputs  
LTC  
Outputs  
LTC  
DVCPROHD/60i  
R-RUN/F-RUN*5  
NDF locked  
30 frames  
24P, 24PA  
R-RUN/F-RUN*3  
DF/NDF  
30 frames  
AVC-I100/60i  
AVC-I50/60i  
Outputs  
LTC  
Outputs  
LTC  
TC:  
30 frames  
tc:  
1 to 30  
FRAME  
Outputs  
LTC UB  
Outputs  
LTC UB  
R-RUN/F-RUN*3  
DF/NDF  
30 frames  
24 frames  
Outputs  
LTC  
Outputs  
LTC  
30 FRAME  
Follows UB  
MODE.  
·In ‘EXT’  
slaves to UB data  
in TC IN/OUT  
connector  
Matches  
recorder  
TC at  
start of  
recording  
Matches  
recorder  
TC at  
start of  
recording  
Same as  
LTC  
value  
AVC-I100/30PN  
AVC-I50/30PN  
R-RUN locked  
DF/NDF  
Every active  
frame  
Frame rate  
Frame  
rate data  
CAMERA  
Other than  
30 FRAME  
1080-  
59.94i  
30 frames  
30 frames/ 30 frames/  
s
s
Converts  
and outputs and outputs  
LTC to 30  
frames  
Converts  
R-RUN/F-RUN*7  
NDF locked  
24 frames  
Recording  
TC:  
24 frames  
Playback  
TC:  
LTC to 30  
frames  
24 FRAME  
Output  
Output  
adjusted adjusted  
to Over to Over  
60i based 60i based  
Matches  
recorder  
TC at  
start of  
recording  
Matches  
recorder  
TC at  
start of  
recording  
AVC-I100/24PN  
AVC-I50/24PN  
R-RUN locked  
NDF locked  
Every active  
frame  
24 frames  
tc:  
30 frames  
on LTC  
UB  
on LTC  
UB  
Other than  
24 FRAME  
24 frames  
30 frames/ 30 frames/  
s
s
Follows UB  
MODE.  
·In ‘EXT’  
slaves to  
LTC UB in  
1394 input  
Records  
TC:  
30 frames  
tc:  
Records  
VITC UB in  
1394 input at LTC UB  
all times  
R-RUN/F-RUN*2 VAUX TC  
DF/NDF  
30 frames  
Outputs  
LTC  
Outputs  
LTC  
Outputs  
Outputs  
LTC UB  
Outputs  
VITC UB  
1394  
DVCPROHD/60i  
in 1394  
input at  
all times*6  
24 frames  
*1: When UB MODE is FRM. RATE, playback of native clips is the pulldown frame rate read from VITC UB.  
*2: In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the value input to the DVCPRO/DV connector. It does not slave it to  
the time code from the TC IN/OUT connector.  
*3: In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the time code input to the TC IN/OUT connector.  
*5: In Free Run mode, it is slaved when TC input to the TC IN/OUT connector is non-drop frame. But not  
slaved to it during recording.  
*6: VAUX TC is time code recorded in the video AUX area in the DVC format.  
*7: In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the time code input to the TC IN/OUT connector, whose value is  
converted to 24 frames when it was NDF 30 frames. But not slaved to it during recording.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using time data (continued)  
Displayed  
TC  
System setting status  
Recorded TC  
Output TC  
Recorded UB  
Output UB  
LTC UB  
LTC and  
VITC  
TC IN/OUT  
VITC UB  
SYSTEM  
MODE  
REC  
SIGNAL  
CAMERA  
MODE  
FRAME  
RATE  
TC tc (24/30  
embedded conversion)  
in HD SDI  
REC FORMAT  
LTC  
VITC  
TC OUT  
LTC UB  
VITC UB  
connector embedded embedded  
UB*1  
in HD SDI*1 in HD SDI  
R-RUN/F-RUN*3  
DF/NDF  
30 frames  
Other than  
24 FRAME  
DVCPROHD/60P  
AVC-I100/60P  
AVC-I50/60P  
R-RUN/F-RUN*5  
24 FRAME NDF locked  
30 frames  
Outputs  
LTC  
Outputs  
LTC  
R-RUN/F-RUN*4  
DF/NDF  
30 FRAME Every active  
frame  
TC:  
30 frames  
tc:  
Outputs  
LTC UB  
Outputs  
LTC UB  
24 frames  
30 frames  
DVCPROHD/30PN  
AVC-I100/30PN  
AVC-I50/30PN  
Matches  
recorder  
TC at  
start of  
recording  
30 frames/ 30 frames/  
s
Matches  
recorder  
TC at  
start of  
recording  
Follows UB  
MODE.  
·In ‘EXT’  
slaves to UB data  
in TC IN/OUT  
connector  
R-RUN locked  
DF/NDF  
Other than  
Same as  
LTC value  
Frame rate  
Frame  
rate data  
Every active  
30 FRAME  
CAMERA  
frame  
30 frames  
720  
-59.94P  
s
R-RUN/F-RUN*7  
NDF locked  
24 FRAME Every active  
frame  
Converts  
and outputs Outputs  
LTC to  
30 frames  
Recording  
TC:  
24 frames  
Playback  
TC:  
24 frames  
tc:  
30 frames  
LTC  
Output  
Output  
24 frames  
adjusted adjusted  
DVCPROHD/24PN  
AVC-I100/24PN  
AVC-I50/24PN  
to Over  
60P  
to Over  
60P  
Matches  
recorder  
TC at  
start of  
recording  
Matches  
recorder  
TC at  
start of  
recording  
R-RUN locked  
NDF locked  
based on based on  
Other than  
LTC UB  
LTC UB  
Every active  
24 FRAME  
frame  
24 frames  
30 frames/ 30 frames/  
s
s
Follows UB  
MODE.  
·In ‘EXT’  
slaves to  
LTC UB in  
1394 input  
Records  
TC:  
30 frames  
tc:  
Records  
VITC UB in  
1394 input at LTC UB  
all times  
R-RUN/F-RUN*2 VAUX TC  
DF/NDF  
30 frames  
Outputs  
LTC  
Outputs  
LTC  
Outputs  
Outputs  
LTC UB  
Outputs  
VITC UB  
1394  
DVCPROHD/60P  
in 1394  
input at  
24 frames  
all times *6  
R-RUN/F-RUN*3  
DF/NDF  
30 frames  
Follows UB  
MODE.  
·In ‘EXT’  
slaves to UB data  
in TC IN/OUT  
connector  
60i, 30P  
Same as  
LTC value  
(but not  
Frame rate  
Outputs  
LTC UB  
CAMERA  
R-RUN/F-RUN*5  
NDF locked  
30 frames  
for DV)  
24P, 24PA  
TC:  
30 frames  
tc:  
DVCPRO50/60i  
DVCPRO/60i  
DV/60i  
480  
-59.94i  
Outputs  
LTC  
No input  
No input No input  
Follows UB  
MODE.  
·In ‘EXT’  
slaves to  
LTC UB in  
1394 input  
24 frames  
Records  
Records  
VITC UB in  
1394 input at LTC UB  
all times  
R-RUN/F-RUN*2 VAUX TC  
DF/NDF  
30 frames  
Outputs  
1394  
in 1394  
input at  
all times *6  
*1: When UB MODE is FRM. RATE, playback of native clips is the pulldown frame rate read from VITC UB.  
*2: In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the value input to the DVCPRO/DV connector. It does not slave it to  
the time code from the TC IN/OUT connector.  
*3: In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the time code input to the TC IN/OUT connector.  
*4: In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the time code input to the TC IN/OUT connector. But not slaved to it  
during recording.  
*5: In Free Run mode, it is slaved when TC input to the TC IN/OUT connector is non-drop frame. But not  
slaved to it during recording.  
*6: VAUX TC is time code recorded in the video AUX area in the DVC format.  
*7: In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the time code input to the TC IN/OUT connector, whose value is  
converted to 24 frames when it was NDF 30 frames. But not slaved to it during recording.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-50i, 720-50P, 573-50i  
Displayed  
TC  
System setting status  
Recorded TC  
Output TC  
Recorded UB  
Output UB  
LTC UB  
LTC and  
VITC  
TC IN/OUT  
VITC UB  
SYSTEM  
MODE  
REC  
SIGNAL  
CAMERA  
FRAME  
RATE  
TC tc (24/30  
embedded conversion)  
in HD SDI  
REC FORMAT  
LTC  
VITC  
TC OUT  
LTC UB  
VITC UB  
connector embedded embedded  
MODE  
UB*1  
in HD SDI*1 in HD SDI  
50i, 25P  
(50i)  
DVCPROHD/50i  
1 to 25  
FRAME  
R-RUN/F-RUN*3  
25 frames  
Outputs  
LTC  
Outputs  
LTC  
AVC-I100/50i  
AVC-I50/50i  
1 to 25  
FRAME  
Follows UB  
MODE.  
·In ‘EXT’  
slaves to UB data  
in TC IN/OUT  
connector  
Same as  
LTC  
value  
TC:  
25 frames  
Frame rate  
Outputs  
LTC UB  
Outputs  
LTC UB  
Frame  
rate data  
R-RUN/F-RUN*3  
25 frames  
Outputs  
LTC  
Outputs  
LTC  
CAMERA  
25FRAME  
Matches  
recorder  
TC at  
Matches  
recorder  
TC at  
1080-50i  
AVC-I100/25PN  
AVC-I50/25PN  
R-RUN locked  
Other than Every active  
25 FRAME frame  
25 frames  
start of  
recording  
start of  
recording  
25 frames/ 25 frames/  
s
s
Follows UB  
MODE.  
·In ‘EXT’  
slaves to  
LTC UB in  
1394 input  
Records  
VAUX TC  
in 1394  
Records  
VITC UB in  
1394 input at LTC UB  
all times  
R-RUN/F-RUN*2  
25 frames  
Outputs  
LTC  
Outputs  
LTC  
TC:  
25 frames  
Outputs  
Outputs  
LTC UB  
Outputs  
VITC UB  
1394  
DVCPROHD/50i  
input at  
all times *6  
Follows UB  
MODE.  
·In ‘EXT’  
slaves to UB  
in TC IN/OUT  
connector  
DVCPROHD/50P  
AVC-I100/50P  
AVC-I50/50P  
I-50  
FRAME  
R-RUN/F-RUN*3  
25 frames  
Outputs  
LTC  
Outputs  
LTC  
R-RUN/F-RUN*4  
Every active  
frame  
Same as  
LTC  
value  
25 FRAME  
TC:  
25 frames  
Frame rate  
data  
Outputs  
LTC UB  
Outputs  
LTC UB  
Frame  
rate data  
CAMERA  
Follows UB  
MODE.  
·In ‘EXT’  
slaves to UB  
in TC IN/OUT  
connector  
25 frames  
DVCPROHD/25PN  
AVC-I100/25PN  
AVC-I50/25PN  
Matches  
recorder  
TC at  
start of  
recording  
Matches  
recorder  
TC at  
start of  
recording  
720-50P  
R-RUN locked  
Other than Every active  
25 FRAME frame  
25 frames  
25 frames/ 25 frames/  
s
s
Follows UB  
MODE.  
·In ‘EXT’  
slaves to  
LTC UB in  
1394 input  
Records  
VAUX TC  
in 1394  
Records  
VITC UB in  
1394 input at LTC UB  
all times  
R-RUN/F-RUN*2  
25 frames  
Outputs  
LTC  
Outputs  
LTC  
TC:  
25 frames  
Outputs  
Outputs  
LTC UB  
Outputs  
VITC UB  
1394  
DVCPROHD/50P  
input at  
all times *6  
Follows UB  
MODE.  
·In ‘EXT’  
slaves to UB data  
in TC IN/OUT  
connector  
Same as  
R-RUN/F-RUN*3 LTC value Outputs  
TC:  
25 frames  
Frame rate  
Outputs  
LTC UB  
CAMERA  
50i, 25P  
25 frames  
(but not  
for DV)  
LTC  
DVCPRO50i  
DVCPRO/50i  
DV/50i  
576-50i  
No input  
No input No input  
Records  
VAUX TC  
in 1394  
Follows UB  
MODE.  
·In ‘EXT’  
slaves to  
LTC UB in  
1394 input  
Records  
VITC UB in  
1394 input at LTC UB  
all times  
R-RUN/F-RUN*2  
25 frames  
Outputs  
LTC  
TC:  
25 frames  
Outputs  
1394  
input at  
all times  
(but not  
for DV)*6  
*1: When UB MODE is FRM. RATE, playback of native clips is the pulldown frame rate read from VITC UB.  
*2: In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the value input to the DVCPRO/DV connector. It does not slave it to  
the time code from the TC IN/OUT connector.  
*3: In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the time code input to the TC IN/OUT connector.  
*4: In Free Run mode, it is slaved to the time code input to the TC IN/OUT connector. But not slaved to it  
during recording.  
*6: VAUX TC is time code recorded in the video AUX area in the DVC format.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic playback operations  
1
2
Turn the POWER/MODE switch to ON.  
While holding down the lock release button,  
turn the POWER/MODE switch to the ON  
position.  
Turn the POWER/MODE to illuminate the  
PB/THUMBNAIL operation lamp.  
The camera-recorder is now in the PB/  
THUMBNAIL mode.  
• Each time you press the button, the mode  
changes as below.  
PB/THUMBNAIL CAMERA  
Mode lamp (PB/THUMBNAIL)  
Turning and holding the POWER/MODE  
switch downward for about 2 seconds after  
entering PB/THUMBNAIL mode switches to  
PC (Personal Computer connection) mode.  
(Page 109)  
Lock release button  
POWER/MODE switch  
For details on playing back clips using thumbnails, see page 75.  
Operations using the Operation lever  
Remote Control  
Play ()  
/REW PLAY  
FF/  
Use this to play back the selected clip when playback has been  
stopped.  
STILL ADV PAUSTILL ADV  
INDEX STOP
During playback, the unit enters the variable speed search  
mode and starts 1x playback. (Page 99)  
Fast-forward ()  
Use this button during playback to fast-forward the selected clip (4  
x speed).  
When the thumbnail screen is cancelled, you can also perform this  
operation while the camera-recorder is stopped. When this button is  
held down, the playback speed becomes faster (32 x speed).  
When pressed during a pause, playback advances one clip.  
/REW PLAY  
FF/  
STILL ADV PAUSE STILL V  
INDEX STOP
Rewind ()  
Use this button during playback to rewind the selected clip (4 x  
speed).  
When the thumbnail screen is cancelled, you can also perform this  
operation while the camera-recorder is stopped. When this button is  
held down, the playback speed becomes faster (32 x speed).  
When pressed during a pause, playback goes back one clip.  
/REW PLAY  
FF/  
STILL V PAUSE STILL ADV  
INDEX
/REW PLAY  
FF/  
Stop ()  
STILL ADV PAUSE STILL ADV  
Press this button during playback/pause to halt the operation and  
return to the thumbnail screen.  
INDEX STOP  
/REW PLAY  
FF/  
Pause ()  
STILL ADV PAUSE STILL ADV  
INDEX ST
Press again to return to playback.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thumbnail operations  
A clip is a data group that includes the images and  
voices created from one shooting session, together  
with additional information such as text memos and  
meta data.  
On this unit, thumbnails of all clips are displayed on  
the LCD monitor by switching to PB/THUMBNAIL  
mode.  
You can carry out the operations below by using  
the Operation lever on the thumbnail screen.  
• Playback, delete, copy or restore the clip.  
• Add or delete a shot mark and a text memo on  
the clip thumbnail.  
• Copy part of a clip by using the text memo.  
• Change the thumbnail image by using the text  
memo.  
• Format P2 cards and SD memory cards.  
• Uploading and editing clip metadata from the SD  
memory card  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thumbnail operations (continued)  
Thumbnail manipulations overview  
Thumbnail screens are configured as follows:  
THUMBNAIL  
OPERATION  
PROPERTY  
ALL CLIP  
DELETE  
FORMAT  
REPAIR CLIP  
RE-CONNECTION  
COPY  
CLIP PROPERTY  
SAME FORMAT CLIPS  
SELECTED CLIPS  
MARKED CLIPS  
TEXT MEMO CLIPS  
EXCH. THUMBNAIL  
EXIT  
CARD STATUS  
SLOT CLIPS  
SET UP  
EXIT  
INDICATOR  
DATA DISPLAY  
DATE FORMAT  
THUMBNAIL SIZE  
PLAYBACK RESUME  
THUMBNAIL INIT  
EXIT  
DEVICES  
PROPERTY SETUP  
EXIT  
META DATA  
HDD  
LOAD  
EXPORT  
EXPLORE  
SETUP  
EXIT  
RECORD  
USER CLIP NAME  
INITIALIZE  
PROPERTY  
EXIT  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Display Mode  
Thumbnail screen  
The type of the thumbnail indicated on the  
display and the types of the other information  
screens are indicated.  
ALL:  
Display all clips.  
The thumbnail screen is displayed on the LCD  
monitor when you turn the POWER/MODE switch  
downward and switch to PB/THUMBNAIL mode.  
Turn the POWER/MODE switch again to return to  
CAMERA mode.  
After changing from CAMERA mode to the  
thumbnail screen, all clips are displayed on the  
thumbnail screen.  
SAME FORMAT:  
Clips in the same format as the system format  
(SYSTEM MODE item, REC FORMAT item)  
are shown.  
• Refer to page 135 for each item.  
SELECT:  
Pressing the MENU button allows you to navigate  
the thumbnail menu.  
The clips selected with the SET button are  
shown.  
MARKER:  
2
1
Display clips with shot marks.  
TEXT MEMO:  
16  
Display clips with text memo data.  
SLOT n:  
3
Display clips in the specified P2 card.  
(n: 1 or 2, which indicates Slots 1 or 2.)  
UPDATING..:  
Indicated when the camera-recorder is  
updating the screen or reading data. When the  
4
5
6
7
screen is being updated, the rotating icon  
indicated.  
is  
Thumbnail screen  
• “Switching the thumbnail display” (Page 80)  
9
10  
8
(Continued on the next page)  
11 12 13 14 15  
Clip icons  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thumbnail operations (continued)  
2. Slot numbers and HDD status  
8. Clip Number  
This section indicates on which P2 card the  
pointed clip is recorded. The number of the  
slot that contains the appropriate P2 card is  
indicated in yellow. If the clip is recorded on  
more than one P2 card, then the numbers of  
all slots that contain the appropriate cards are  
indicated. The numbers of the other slots are  
shown in white if they contain P2 cards.  
When the following P2 card is inserted, the slot  
number is displayed with a pink frame.  
• RUN DOWN CARD  
(A P2 card on which the maximum number of  
overwrites has been exceeded.)  
• DIR ENTRY NG CARD  
(A P2 card on which the directory structure is  
not supported.)  
The numbers set by the camera-recorder for all  
the clips recognised correctly by the P2 card.  
These numbers are allocated in chronological  
order, by shooting dates and times.  
If clips cannot be played because of different  
recording formats, they are displayed in red.  
9.  
Defective Clip Indicator and  
Unknown Clip indicator  
This marker is displayed for defective clips,  
which may result from a variety of causes, e.g.,  
powering-down during recording.  
Clip with yellow defective clip indicators can be  
restored in some cases.  
• “Restoring clips” (Page 85)  
A clip displayed with a red corrupt marker  
cannot be restored and must be deleted. If the  
clip cannot be deleted, format the P2 card.  
The USB HDD section is indicated as follows:  
• Other than the USB HOST mode: gray  
• Not connected in USB HOST mode: gray  
• HDD recognized and usable in USB HOST  
mode: white  
• HDD recognized and thumbnails shown in  
USB HOST mode: yellow  
• HDD recognized and not usable in USB  
HOST: red  
is displayed for clips such as those which  
differ in format from the P2 standard.  
10.  
11.  
12.  
Incomplete Clip Indicator  
Indicates that although a clip is recorded across  
multiple P2 cards, one of these cards is not  
inserted into a P2 card slot.  
Shot Mark Indicator  
This marker is displayed for a clip with a shot  
mark attached.  
3. Time Display  
• “Shot mark” (Page 82)  
You can set this to display the time code at the  
start of clip recording (TC), the user bits at the  
start of clip recording (UB), the shooting time  
(TIME), the shooting date (DATE), the shooting  
time date and time (DATE TIME), the clip name  
(CLIP NAME) or the user clip name (USER  
CLIP NAME).  
Indicator for clips with proxy  
This is displayed on clips for which proxy  
recorded on a proxy supporting P2 camera  
recorder such as an AJ-HPX3100 is attached.  
13.  
14.  
Text Memo Indicator  
This marker is displayed for a clip with a text  
memo attached.  
• “Setting the thumbnail display mode” (Page 92)  
4. Recording mode  
The recording mode for the clip on which the  
pointer is located is indicated.  
Edit Copied Clip Indicator  
This marker is displayed on a clip when the  
model supports edit copy, such as the AJ-  
HPM200. For more information about edit  
copying, see the instruction manual for a mode  
that supports edit copying.  
5. System format  
The format for the clip on which the pointer is  
located is indicated.  
15.  
Wide Clip Indicator  
6. Duration  
This marker is displayed for clips recorded  
with the 16:9 aspect ratio. However, it does not  
accompany clips in HD format.  
The duration of the clip on which the pointer is  
located is indicated.  
7. USB HOST mode indicator  
Indicated when the mode has been switched to  
USB HOST.  
16. Thumbnail Scroll Bar  
Indicates which part of the whole thumbnail is  
currently being viewed.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting thumbnails  
Playing back clips  
Multiple thumbnails can be randomly selected in  
the thumbnail screen.  
1
Turn the POWER/MODE switch to set to PB/  
THUMBNAIL mode.  
1
Push the Operation lever in the ◄ ►  
direction to the clip you wish to select, and  
press SET.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD  
monitor.  
2
3
Push the Operation lever in the ◄ ►  
direction and position the pointer on the  
clip you wish to play back.  
The frame around the selected thumbnail  
changes to a blue frame. Press the SET button  
on the Operation lever again to deselect the  
clip.  
Push the Operation lever in the ▲ direction  
(► playback).  
• The clip under the pointer will be played back  
on the LCD monitor.  
2
Additional clips can be selected by  
repeating Step 1.  
• When playback of the clip over which the  
cursor is placed is finished, subsequent clips  
that can be played back are played back in  
the order they are displayed on the thumbnail  
screen, and when playback of the final clip is  
complete the system returns to the thumbnail  
screen.  
It is possible to display only the selected thumbnails  
in the thumbnail screen for playback.  
• “Switching the thumbnail display” (Page 80)  
MENU button  
Operation lever  
When playing back clips, it is not  
necessary to “select” the clips (blue  
frames around the thumbnails).  
Clips with clip numbers displayed in  
red cannot be played.  
You can perform actions such as fast forward,  
rewind, and pause during operation by using the  
Operation lever or remote control. See page 74 for  
details.  
• During clip playback, push the Operation lever  
in the direction (STOP) to stop playback and  
return to the thumbnail screen.  
LCD Monitor  
When playback is stopped, the position  
of the pointer moves to the clip that was  
being played back, regardless of where the  
playback started.  
Push the Operation lever in the ▼ direction  
(► play back) again to start playback from  
the beginning of the clip under the pointer.  
To continue playing from where previously  
stopped, turn the PLAYBACK RESUME  
setting “ON” in “Setting the thumbnail  
display mode” on page 92.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thumbnail operations (continued)  
Switching the thumbnail display  
ALL CLIP:  
Display all clips.  
The display can be switched so that only those  
clips matching the specified conditions are  
displayed in the thumbnail screen.  
SAME FORMAT CLIPS:  
Displays clips of the current system format.  
SELECTED CLIPS:  
Display randomly selected clips. At this time the  
thumbnails appear in selected order.  
1
Turn the POWER/MODE switch to set to PB/  
THUMBNAIL mode.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD  
monitor.  
MARKED CLIPS:  
Display clips with shot marks attached.  
2
Press the MENU button.  
The thumbnail menu appears.  
MENU button  
TEXT MEMO CLIPS:  
Display clips with text memo data attached.  
SLOT CLIPS:  
Display clips recorded in the P2 card inserted in  
the specified slot.  
When this item is selected, SLOT1 to SLOT2 are  
displayed as a sub-menu. Select the desired slot  
to display the clips.  
3
Select THUMBNAIL from the thumbnail  
menu.  
Switch the thumbnail display by selecting one  
of the following items:  
SETUP:  
Please refer to “Setting the thumbnail display  
mode” (Page 92) for information about this item.  
EXIT:  
Close the sub-menu.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing thumbnails  
Display clip properties by selecting  
PROPERTY → CLIP PROPERTY on the  
thumbnail menu to confirm the position of  
the thumbnail (the number of frames from  
the top of the clip). Since thumbnails come  
generally from the top of the clip, [0] is  
displayed.  
It is possible to replace thumbnails with images  
that include previously attached text memos while  
images are recorded or played back.  
1
Add text memos to images that you intend  
to change.  
Refer to “Text memo recording” (Page 42) for the  
method to add text memos.  
2
3
Select THUMBNAIL → TEXT MEMO CLIPS  
to display thumbnails of the clips with text  
memos.  
Place the pointer on the clip of the  
thumbnail that you intend to change, and  
then press SET of Operation lever. Move  
the pointer to the text memo display on the  
lower row.  
4
Select the thumbnail that you intend to  
replace, place the pointer on it, and then  
select OPERATION → EXCH. THUMBNAIL  
on the thumbnail menu.  
5
A YES/NO confirmation screen is displayed  
when you press SET on the Operation lever.  
Use the Operation lever to select YES.  
The menu closes and the thumbnail for the clip  
is replaced.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thumbnail operations (continued)  
Shot mark  
Text memo  
A shot mark can be added to a clip thumbnail to  
distinguish this clip from the others.  
During recording or playback, you can add text  
memos to clips. Text memos can be used to play  
back clips at some point or break clips into chunks  
and copy the necessary portions.  
1
Turn the POWER/MODE switch to set to PB/  
THUMBNAIL mode.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD  
monitor.  
Adding a text memo  
Text memos can be added in one of the following  
ways.  
• During recording/playback, press the USER  
button to which the text memo function has been  
allocated.  
2
3
Push the Operation lever in the ◄ ►  
direction and position the pointer on the  
clip you wish to attach a shot mark to.  
Press the USER button to which the shot  
mark function has been allocated.  
• This adds a shot mark to the thumbnail of the  
clip at the pointer position.  
To delete a shot mark, position the pointer  
over the desired clip again and press the  
USER button to which the shot mark function  
has been allocated.  
A text memo is attached at the position where the  
button was pressed. (Page 42)  
• Pressing the USER button to which the text  
memo function has been allocated when the  
thumbnail screen is displayed adds a text memo  
at the start of the clip currently indicated by the  
pointer.  
• “Using the USER buttons” (Page 39)  
• “Using the USER buttons” (Page 39)  
One clip can have up to 100 text and voice  
memos in combination. Note that camera-  
recorder is not capable of adding or showing  
voice memos.  
A shot mark can be attached during  
recording.  
Adding shot marks after recording stops,  
attaches the shot mark to the most recently  
recorded clip.  
· “Shot mark function” (Page 41)  
When adding a shot mark to (or deleting  
the shot mark from) a clip recorded across  
multiple P2 cards, do this with all these P2  
cards inserted into P2 card slots.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing back a clip at the position  
where a text memo is recorded  
4
With the pointer at the bottom, push the  
Operation lever in the ◄ ► direction and  
position it on the text memo number you  
wish to play back then push the Operation  
lever in the ▲ direction (► playback).  
• Playback will start from the time code  
position of the text memo where the pointer  
is located. If the Opetation lever in the   
direction (STOP) is pressed during playback  
or the playback has finished at the end of  
the clip, then the thumbnail screen appears  
again with the pointer replaced with the text  
memo where the playback started.  
1
Turn the POWER/MODE switch to set to PB/  
THUMBNAIL mode.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD  
monitor.  
2
Press the MENU button and select  
THUMBNAIL → TEXT MEMO CLIPS from  
the thumbnail menu.  
The clip thumbnails with text memos attached  
are displayed in the upper section of the LCD  
monitor. The lower section of the LCD monitor  
shows information about the text memo on the  
clip selected by the pointer.  
• Press the MENU button to select EXIT or  
press the EXIT button to return the pointer to  
the upper part of the thumbnail screen.  
Pressing the START/STOP button in the  
text memo screen will not start recording.  
For AVC-Intra format clips that cannot be  
played back, text memo thumbnails cannot  
be displayed, and may be shown as a  
icon.  
Thumbnail  
Display  
Shows the still image that the  
text memo is related to.  
Deleting a text memo  
Selected text memo clips  
(blue) and total clips (white)  
1
Select the desired text memo by carrying  
out steps 1–3 for “Playing back a clip at the  
position where a text memo is recorded”  
(Left).  
3
Move the pointer over the clip that contains  
the desired text memo to playback and  
press the SET button on Operation lever.  
The pointer moves to the lower part of the LCD  
monitor.  
2
3
Move the pointer to the desired text  
memo, and then press the SET button on  
Operation lever.  
Press the MENU button to select  
OPERATION → DELETE from the thumbnail  
menu.  
A YES/NO screen appears to confirm that you  
wish to delete. Select YES with the Operation  
lever to delete the text memo.  
The pointer moves down.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thumbnail operations (continued)  
Using a text memo to break a clip and  
copy the necessary portion  
Deleting clips  
1
Turn the POWER/MODE switch to set to PB/  
THUMBNAIL mode.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD  
monitor.  
1
Select a desired text memo in a clip by  
carrying out steps 1-3 for “Playing back a  
clip at the position where a text memo is  
recorded” (Page 83).  
2
Push the Operation lever in the ◄ ►  
direction and position it on the clip you  
wish to delete. Press SET on the Operation  
lever to select the clip.  
2
Move the pointer to the desired text memo,  
and then press the SET button on the  
Operation lever.  
Multiple clips can be selected.  
You can select more than one text memo.  
3
4
Press the MENU button and select  
OPERATION → DELETE from the thumbnail  
menu.  
3
4
Press the MENU button to select  
OPERATION → COPY.  
User the Operation lever and SET buttons  
to select the destination slot. Then, select  
YES.  
The following screen appears. Use the  
Operation lever to select YES.  
• Copying starts.  
• The portion between the selected text memo  
and the next one is copied. If no text memo  
is found after the selected one, then all part  
after the selected text memo is copied.  
• If multiple text memos are selected, the  
selected sections are copied.  
• When the clip is being copied, the camera-  
recorder indicates the progress of the  
copy process and cancellation status. To  
discontinue the copy process, press the SET  
button on the Operation lever. Then, a YES/  
NO confirmation screen is displayed. Use the  
Operation lever to select YES.  
The clip is deleted. All selected clips (in blue-  
green frames) are deleted by this operation.  
To interrupt deleting, press the SET button on  
the Operation lever to cancel the operation.  
Partially deleted clips cannot be restored by  
canceling.  
In clip division and copying using the text  
memo function, the area copied may be  
automatically modified depending on the  
recording format of the clip.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Restoring clips  
Reconnection of incomplete clips  
Restores clips that are defective as a result of  
sudden powering-down during recording, or  
removal of the P2 card being accessed.  
Incomplete clips may be generated when clips  
recorded on multiple P2 cards (connected clips) are  
separately copied to different cards. Reconnection  
function generates one clip (the original, connected  
clip) from incomplete clips.  
Only those clips with yellow corrupt clip  
markers can be restored. Clips with a red  
corrupt clip indicator cannot be repaired.  
Please delete such clips. If the clip cannot be  
deleted, format the P2 card.  
During restoration of the clips, however, the  
defective-clip indicator may change from  
yellow to red, resulting in inability to restore  
the clips.  
1
2
3
Turn the POWER/MODE switch to set to PB/  
THUMBNAIL mode.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD  
monitor.  
Use the Operation lever to select  
incomplete clips to reconnect.  
Usually, thumbnails of incomplete clips (clips  
with  
marker) are displayed in line.  
1
2
Turn the POWER/MODE switch to set to PB/  
THUMBNAIL mode.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD  
monitor.  
Press the MENU button and select  
OPERATION → RE-CONNECTION from the  
thumbnail menu.  
A YES/NO confirmation screen asks you to  
confirm that you want to reconnect the clip.  
Select YES with the Operation lever if you wish  
to reconnect the incomplete clip.  
Push the Operation lever in the ◄ ►  
direction and position it on the clip you  
wish to restore (clips with the yellow  
corrupt clip indicator which signifies that  
they can be restored are displayed). Press  
SET on the Operation lever to select the  
clip.  
Clips that are connected as a group must be  
grouped together or they will be displayed as  
incomplete clips.  
3
Press the MENU button, and select  
OPERATION → REPAIR CLIP from the  
thumbnail menu.  
A YES/NO confirmation screen asks you to  
confirm that you want to repair the clip. Select  
YES with the Operation lever if you wish to  
restore the clip.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thumbnail operations (continued)  
Copying clips  
Do not turn off the power or remove a P2  
card while data is being copied. Doing  
so may cause the P2 card to fail. If you  
should accidentally perform one of the  
its operations, defective clips will be  
generated. Delete them, and then copy  
them again.  
When clips are copied to P2 cards, all the  
information on the clips is copied. However,  
when they are copied to the SD memory  
card*, video and sound information is not  
copied, only thumbnails, clip metadata,  
icons, Voice Memo, proxy, and real-time  
metadata.  
When there is insufficient recording  
capacity on the destination, the message  
“LACK OF REC CAPACITY!” is displayed,  
and copying will not proceed. When clips  
to be copied include some with defects, the  
message “CANNOT ACCESS!” is displayed,  
and copying will not proceed. If you attempt  
to copy the clips to the same card, “NO  
COPY TO SAME CARD!” is displayed and  
copy is not performed.  
Selected clips can be copied to the P2 card or SD  
memory card in the desired slot.  
1
Turn the POWER/MODE switch to set to PB/  
THUMBNAIL mode.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD  
monitor.  
2
Use the Operation lever to move the pointer  
to the desired clip and press the SET  
button on the Operation lever.  
If recording using the one-clip REC function  
in which the clip can be combined with the  
previous clip (when “1*CLIP” is displayed),  
then copying of clips is not possible.  
After changing to CAMERA mode, push the  
Operation lever in the ▼ direction (STOP) for  
approximately 2 seconds, and try again after  
ending clip linking.  
3
Press the MENU button and select  
OPERATION → COPY from the thumbnail  
menu.  
To interrupt copying, press the SET button  
on the Operation lever. Clips currently  
being copied to the destination will be  
deleted.  
When identical clips exist on the  
destination card, the “OVERWRITE?” is  
displayed. Select “YES” or “NO”.  
*
Regarding SD memory cards to be used, see  
<Cautions in using SD memory cards> (Page 162).  
• Select Slot 1–2 or SD memory card as the  
destination.  
• A YES/NO confirmation screen asks you to  
confirm that you want to copy the clip. Select  
YES with the Operation lever if you wish to  
copy the incomplete clip.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting of clip meta data  
During display of names of metadata, push  
the Operation lever in the ► direction to  
switch to display of file names. Push the  
Operation lever in the ◄ direction to return  
to display of metadata names.  
Information such as the name of person who shot  
the video, the name of the reporter, the shooting  
location, or a text memo can be read from the SD  
memory card, and can be recorded as Clip Meta  
Data.  
Reading clip meta data  
(metadata upload)  
1
2
Insert the SD memory card that contains  
the Clip Meta Data (metadata upload file).  
Turn the POWER/MODE switch to set to PB/  
THUMBNAIL mode.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD  
monitor.  
Press the MENU button while pressing DISP/  
MODE CHK switch when a thumbnail is  
displayed to move to Step 4.  
3
4
Press the MENU button and Select META  
DATA → LOAD from the thumbnail menu,  
and press the SET button on the Operation  
lever.  
Names of metadata upload files stored on  
the SD memory card are displayed.  
Select the desired files using the Operation  
lever, and choose YES.  
• Upload starts.  
• Uploaded metadata is retained even if the  
power is turned off.  
• For confirmation of uploaded data, see  
“Checking and modifying read metadata”  
(Page 89).  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thumbnail operations (continued)  
Clip meta data items  
DEVICE:  
Displays [MANUFACTURER] (name of the device  
manufacturer), [SERIAL NO.] (serial number of  
the device) and [MODEL NAME] (model name of  
the device).  
Clip Meta Data includes the following items:  
Underlined items can be set by reading the  
metadata upload file on the SD memory card.  
Other items are set automatically during shooting.  
Using the P2 viewer, metadata upload files can be  
written to SD memory cards using a PC. Download  
the latest version of the P2 viewer from the  
following URL and install it to your PC.  
SHOOT: *2  
Displays [SHOOTER] (name of the person who  
shot the video), [START DATE] (start date of  
shooting), [END DATE] (end date of shooting),  
and [LOCATION] ALTITUDE/LONGITUDE/  
LATITUDE/SOURCE/PLACE NAME (altitude,  
longitude, latitude, and source of the information  
and name of the location).  
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/  
Regarding SD memory cards to be used, see  
SCENARIO:  
<Cautions in using SD memory cards> (Page 162).  
Displays [PROGRAM NAME], [SCENE NO.], and  
[TAKE NO.].  
The file which was edited by except P2  
viewer is displayed as “UNKNOWN DATA”,  
and may not be read.  
NEWS:  
Displays [REPORTER] (name of the reporter),  
[PURPOSE] (purpose of shooting), and  
[OBJECT] (object of shooting).  
GLOBAL CLIP ID:  
Displays the global clip ID, which indicates the  
shooting status of the clip.  
MEMO:*3  
Displays [NO.] (the number of the text memo),  
[OFFSET] (location of the frame where the  
text memo is added), [PERSON] (person who  
recorded the text memo added to the clip), and  
[TEXT] (contents of the text memo).  
USER CLIP NAME: *1  
Displays the clip name specified by the user.  
VIDEO:  
Displays [FRAME RATE] (frame rate of the clip),  
[PULL DOWN], and [ASPECT RATIO].  
THUMBNAIL:  
Displays the location of the frame (frame offset)  
and the size (height and width) of the image  
selected as the thumbnail image.  
AUDIO:  
[SAMPLING RATE] (sampling frequency of  
recorded sound) and [BITS PER SAMPLE]  
(digitized bit[s] of recorded sound).  
PROXY:  
This displays format and other such information  
for proxy, if present.  
ACCESS:  
Displays [CREATOR] (person who recorded the  
clip), [CREATION DATE] (date when the clip was  
recorded), [LAST UPDATE DATE] (date of the  
latest update of the clip), and [LAST UPDATE  
PERSON] (person who made the latest update of  
the clip).  
Displays in the CLIP PROPERTY screen.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
*1: The USER CLIP NAME recording method is  
selectable. For details, refer to “Selecting the  
USER CLIP NAME recording method” (Page  
90).  
*2: ALTITUDE/LATITUDE/LONGITUDE in SHOOT  
are not automatically set during shooting with  
this unit.  
These can be set in the properties of recorded  
clips.  
*3: Be sure to enter TEXT when entering MEMO.  
It is not possible to record only PERSON or  
OFFSET.  
Checking and modifying read  
metadata  
The camera-recorder allows you to check the  
details of read metadata.  
1
Turn the POWER/MODE switch to set to PB/  
THUMBNAIL mode.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD  
monitor.  
2
Press the MENU button to select META  
DATA → PROPERTY from the thumbnail  
menu.  
The following screen is displayed:  
3
4
Use the Operation lever to move the  
pointer. Then, press the SET button on the  
Operation lever.  
This allows you to view the settings of the read  
metadata.  
While viewing the settings for the metadata,  
use the Operation lever to move the pointer  
to the desired option. Then, press the SET  
button on the Operation lever.  
• A software keyboard screen is displayed,  
allowing you to modify the setting.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thumbnail operations (continued)  
* The COUNT value is indicated as a four-digit  
number.  
To set whether or not the uploaded  
metadata is recorded  
The COUNT value is incremented each time a  
new clip is captured if clip metadata has been  
read in and TYPE2 has been selected as the  
recording method.  
The COUNT value can be reset using the  
following procedure.  
Set ON/OFF in META DATA → RECORD from the  
thumbnail menu. The factory setting is OFF.  
Selecting the USER CLIP NAME  
recording method  
Select META DATA → PROPERTY from the  
thumbnail menu, then select USER CLIP NAME  
to display the menu shown below.  
Select META DATA → USER CLIP NAME from the  
thumbnail menu to select the recording method.  
Two options are available: TYPE1 and TYPE2.  
Select COUNT RESET with the Operation lever  
and press the SET button on the Operation lever  
to reset the COUNT value to 1.  
TYPE1 (Factory setting)  
USER CLIP NAME to be  
recorded  
If clip metadata has  
been read in  
Uploaded data  
If no clip metadata has Same as GLOBAL CLIP  
been read in or if the  
setting for recording  
clip metadata has  
been turned off  
ID (UMID data)  
TYPE2  
When a P2 card with a memory capacity of 8  
GB or more is used in camera-recorder and a  
one-time continuous recording exceeds the  
prescribed duration (DVCPRO HD and the  
AVC-Intra 100: about 5 minutes; DVCPRO50  
and the AVC-Intra 50: about 10 minutes;  
DVCPRO or for DV: about 20 minutes) or  
when a one-time recording extends over  
more than one P2 card, the recording  
USER CLIP NAME to be  
recorded  
If clip metadata has  
been read in  
Uploaded data + COUNT  
value*  
If no clip metadata has Same as CLIP NAME  
been read in or if the  
setting for recording  
clip metadata has  
been turned off  
concerned will automatically be undertaken  
as a separate clip. At this time, each clip will  
be provided with its own COUNT value.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example of recording (DVCPRO HD) a clip on  
one P2 card:  
Formatting a P2 card  
REC start  
Recording pause  
1
Turn the POWER/MODE switch to set to PB/  
THUMBNAIL mode.  
Recording duration = Approx. 7 min.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD  
monitor.  
Clip 1  
COUNT value  
= 0001  
Clip 2  
COUNT value  
= 0002  
2
Press the MENU button and select  
OPERATION → FORMAT from thethumbnail  
menu.  
• When the screen shown below appears,  
select the slot number of the P2 card you  
want to format and press the SET button on  
the Operation lever.  
5 min.  
2 min.  
Example of recording a clip on two P2 cards:  
REC start  
Recording pause  
Clip 1  
COUNT value  
= 0003  
Clip 2  
COUNT value  
= 0004  
• Select EXIT if formatting is not required.  
1st card  
2nd card  
If the clip thumbnails are displayed as shown in the  
example above or their properties are indicated  
using a P2 device, the thumbnail and COUNT  
value of clip 1 will be displayed.  
3
The following screen appears. Use the  
Operation lever to select YES.  
Clear the uploaded metadata  
Select META DATA → INITIALIZE from the  
thumbnail menu, and press the SET button on the  
Operation lever. A YES/NO confirmation screen  
asks you to confirm that you want to initialize.  
Select YES using the Operation lever to initialize  
META DATA and clear the data read.  
The selected P2 card is formatted.  
Check that no important data remains on a  
card before formatting since data erased by  
formatting cannot be recovered.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thumbnail operations (continued)  
Formatting SD memory cards  
Setting the thumbnail display mode  
SD memory cards can also be formatted from  
the thumbnail screen. With an SD memory card  
inserted into the camera-recorder, perform the  
following operation:  
The thumbnail display mode can be customised to  
suit your preferences.  
1
Turn the POWER/MODE switch to set to PB/  
THUMBNAIL mode.  
1
Turn the POWER/MODE switch to set to PB/  
THUMBNAIL mode.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD  
monitor.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD  
monitor.  
2
Press the MENU button and select  
THUMBNAIL → SETUP from thethumbnail  
menu.  
2
Press the MENU button and select  
OPERATION → FORMAT from thethumbnail  
menu.  
The following screen appears.  
• The following screen appears. Select SD  
CARD and press the SET button on the  
Operation lever.  
• Select EXIT if formatting is not required.  
INDICATOR:  
Select which indicators you want to show on  
thumbnails and which you want to hide.  
ALL HIDE:  
ON: All indicators (MARKER, TEXT MEMO,  
WIDE, PROXY) are not displayed.  
OFF: Indication/No indication will be set  
depending on the following menu. The  
factory settings are as follows.  
MARKER:  
3
The following screen appears. Use the  
Operation lever to select YES.  
Switches the shot mark marker between  
indication and no indication (ON/OFF). The  
factory setting is ON (indication).  
TEXT MEMO:  
Switches the text memo marker between  
indication and no indication (ON/OFF). The  
factory setting is ON (indication).  
WIDE:  
Switches the wide marker between indication  
and no indication (ON/OFF). The factory  
setting is ON (indication).  
The SD memory card is formatted.  
SD memory cards can also be formatted  
from the menu screen. (Page 150)  
Check that no important data remains on a  
card before formatting since data erased by  
formatting cannot be recovered.  
PROXY:  
Switches the proxy indicator between  
indication and no indication (ON/OFF).  
The factory setting is ON (indication).  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DATA DISPLAY:  
Properties  
The time display field of the clip offers a choice  
of Time Code (TC), User Bits (UB), Shooting  
Time (TIME), Shooting Date (DATE), Shooting  
Time and Date (DATE TIME), clip name (CLIP  
NAME) or user clip name (USER CLIP NAME).  
The factory setting is Time Code.  
The clip’s properties and the P2 card’s status are  
displayed.  
It is possible to edit and rewrite recorded clip  
metadata while clip properties are displayed.  
Clip property  
DATE FORMAT:  
From the thumbnail menu, select PROPERTY →  
CLIP PROPERTY. The following screen appears.  
You can specify the display order for the  
shooting date as either Year/Month/Day (Y-M-D),  
Month/Day/Year (M-D-Y) or Day/Month/Year  
(D-M-Y).  
3
1
2
The factory setting is Month/Day/Year. (Only for  
AG-HPX250P)  
The factory setting is Day/Month/Year. (Only for  
AG-HPX250EN)  
5
4
This setting is reflected in the recording date  
shown in the clip property and the shooting date  
shown when DATE is selected under the item  
DATA DISPLAY.  
1. Clip Number  
2. Thumbnail  
THUMBNAIL SIZE:  
For the size of thumbnails displayed on one  
screen, either LARGE (3 2 thumbnails  
displayed) or NORMAL (4 3 thumbnails  
displayed) can be selected. The factory default  
value is NORMAL.  
3. Clip Information  
Indicates the indicators added to the clip and  
the number of text and voice memos added to  
the clip.  
The  
mark appears if the clip is recorded on a  
PLAYBACK RESUME:  
writeprotected P2 card.  
Selecting a position to restart playback after  
stopping playback on the thumbnails screen  
pushing the Operation lever in the direction  
(STOP).  
ON: Playback starts from the stop position.  
OFF: Playback starts from the beginning of the  
clip indicated by the pointer.  
AG-HPX250P/EN is not capable of  
recording or playing back voice memos.  
Pushing the Operation lever in the ◄ ►  
direction displays the properties of the  
previous/next clip.  
Note that if the pointer is moved after stopping  
playback, the playback will restart from the  
beginning of the clip indicated by the pointer  
regardless of this setting. Also, attempting to  
play back from the end of all the available clips  
will cause the screen to flash momentarily,  
indicating that the there are no more clips which  
can be played back.  
(Continued on the next page)  
THUMBNAIL INIT:  
Return the above thumbnail display settings  
to default. Move the cursor to this option, and  
press the SET button on the Operation lever.  
Select “YES” when the confirmation screen is  
displayed.  
EXIT:  
Returns to the previous menu.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thumbnail operations (continued)  
4. Clip Information  
Modification of recorded clip metadata  
Displays detailed information about the clip.  
1
Display the window for detailed clip  
metadata that you intend to modify in the  
clip properties window.  
CLIP NAME:  
Display clip names.  
START TC:  
The time code value at the start of the  
recording.  
START UB:  
The user bit value at the start of the recording.  
DATE:  
2
Place the cursor on the item to be modified  
using the Operation lever.  
The metadata that can be modified are shown  
like [CREATOR] in the following figure.  
The date of the recording.  
TIME:  
The time at the start of the recording.  
DURATION:  
The time length of the clip.  
V_FORMAT:  
The recording format for the clip.  
FRAME RATE:  
3
Press the SET button on the Operation  
lever.  
The frame rate for the playback.  
REC RATE:  
The input window (soft keyboard) for  
modifying metadata is displayed.  
Use the keyboard to modify the metadata.  
The recording frame rate is displayed. (Only  
displayed when using the VFR function to  
record in Native mode)  
5. Clip Meta Data  
Displays more detailed data about the clip.  
Use the cursor buttons to move the pointer,  
and press the SET button to check the detailed  
content. The underlined items are automatically  
set during shooting.  
• “Clip meta data items” (Page 88)  
The keyboard operation is the same as  
“Checking and modifying read metadata”  
(Page 89).  
4
Press OK on the keyboard.  
The modified metadata on the clip is written  
and return to the metadata window.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P2 card status display  
Deleting only the respective items of  
LOCATION (recording location data)  
in SHOOT is not possible. By setting  
ALTITUDE to empty, other LONGITUDE/  
LATITUDE items are collectively deleted.  
P2 Card Status Display Settings  
Select PROPERTY → CARD STATUS from the  
thumbnail menu to set the desired indication mode  
(remaining free space or used memory capacity)  
for the P2 card status display.  
The metadata for a clip with the  
incomplete clip indicator cannot be  
modified. For the clips recorded on multiple  
P2 cards, modify the metadata while all P2  
cards are inserted.  
1
Turn the POWER/MODE switch to set to PB/  
THUMBNAIL mode.  
The thumbnail screen appears on the LCD  
monitor.  
Any MEMO with 101 characters or more  
cannot be modified.  
2
Press the MENU button and select  
PROPERTY → PROPERTY SETUP → P2  
CARD CAP from the thumbnail menu.  
The following screen appears. Select the P2  
card status display settings from the P2 CARD  
CAP menu option.  
REMAIN:  
Show remaining free space on the P2 card as the  
P2 card status display. (Factory setting)  
USED:  
Show used memory capacity on the P2 card as  
the P2 card status display.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thumbnail operations (continued)  
3. P2 Card Remaining Capacity/Total Capacity  
Displays the P2 card remaining capacity and  
total capacity in minutes. The total of the  
remaining memory capacity for each P2 card  
that is displayed may not match the actual total  
remaining memory capacity for the P2 cards  
because only the figure in minute is displayed.  
During native recording with VFR, this changes  
depending on the frame rate.  
Contents of P2 card status display  
settings  
From the thumbnail menu, select PROPERTY →  
CARD STATUS. The following screen appears.  
When “REMAIN” is selected:  
1
2
4. Total remaining free space for the slot  
Displays the total remaining free space for all 2  
slots.  
Please note that the remaining capacity of a  
writeprotected P2 card is not included in the  
total remaining capacity.  
3
5
4
When REC FUNCTION is set to LOOP, the slot  
total indicates the standard recording time for  
loop recording. However, when PROPERTY  
SETUP → USED is selected, the used space  
of the slot total is greater than that actually  
used, and is less than that actually used when  
PROPERTY SETUP → REMAIN is selected.  
5. Warning symbol  
1. Write-protect Mark  
The mark appears if the P2 card is write-  
protected.  
2. P2 Card Status (remaining free space)  
The remaining memory capacity of the P2 card  
is indicated by a bar graph and percentage.  
The bar graph indicator moves to the left as the  
remaining free space decreases.  
The following indications may appear,  
depending on the card status:  
FORMAT ERROR:  
When the following P2 card is detected, the  
symbol is displayed.  
RUN DOWN CARD:  
The maximum number of overwrites on the P2  
card has been exceeded.  
DIR ENTRY NG CARD:  
An unformatted P2 card is inserted.  
NOT SUPPORTED:  
The directory structure on the P2 card is not  
supported.  
An unsupported card is inserted in the camera-  
recorder.  
The warning can be confirmed on the P2 card  
detailed information indication in “2. P2 Card  
Status (remaining free space)” (Page 96).  
NO CARD:  
P2 cards are not inserted.  
Push the Operation lever in the   direction  
to place the cursor on the P2 card for data you  
want to access and press the SET button on the  
Operation lever to display detailed information  
about the P2 card to check individual information  
such as the serial number and the user ID.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When “USED” is selected:  
4. Total used memory capacity for all slots  
Displays the total used memory capacity for all  
2 slots.  
1
2
Please note that the remaining capacity of a  
writeprotected P2 card is not included in the  
total remaining capacity.  
3
5
4
When REC FUNCTION is set to LOOP, the slot  
total indicates the standard recording time for  
loop recording. However, when PROPERTY  
SETUP → USED is selected, the used space  
of the slot total is greater than that actually  
used, and is less than that actually used when  
PROPERTY SETUP → REMAIN is selected.  
5. Warning symbol  
1. Write-protect Mark  
The mark appears if the P2 card is write-  
protected.  
2. P2 Card Status (used memory capacity)  
The used memory capacity of the P2 card is  
indicated by a bar graph and a percentage  
figure. The bar graph indicator moves to the  
right as the used memory capacity increases.  
The following indications may appear,  
depending on the card status:  
FORMAT ERROR:  
An unformatted P2 card is inserted.  
NOT SUPPORTED:  
An unsupported card is inserted in the camera-  
recorder.  
When the following P2 card is detected, the  
symbol is displayed.  
RUN DOWN CARD:  
The maximum number of overwrites on the  
P2 card has been exceeded.  
DIR ENTRY NG CARD:  
The directory structure on the P2 card is not  
supported.  
The warning can be confirmed on the P2 card  
detailed information indication in “2. P2 Card  
Status (used memory capacity)” (Page 97).  
NO CARD:  
P2 cards are not inserted.  
Push the Operation lever in the   direction  
to place the cursor on the P2 card for data you  
want to access and press the SET button on the  
Operation lever to display detailed information  
about the P2 card to check individual information  
such as the serial number and the user ID.  
3. P2 Card memory capacity/Total Capacity  
Displays the used memory capacity on a P2  
card and the total capacity, in minutes. Because  
fractions are truncated, the figure shown for  
used memory capacity on a P2 card may differ  
from the figure for total capacity.  
The used memory capacity of a write-protected  
P2 card is displayed as 100%.  
During native recording with VFR, this changes  
depending on the frame rate.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Thumbnail operations (continued)  
SD memory card status display  
The status display enables a confirmation of the  
SD memory card formatted condition, available  
memory capacity etc.  
From the thumbnail menu, select PROPERTY →  
DEVICES → SD CARD.  
SD STANDARD:  
Indicates that an SD memory card is formatted  
according to the SD/SDHC standard.  
SUPPORTED:  
Complies with SD/SDHC  
NOT SUPPORTED:  
Does not comply with SD/SDHC  
USED:  
Used capacity (bytes)  
BLANK:  
Free space (bytes)  
TOTAL:  
Total capacity (bytes)  
NUMBER OF CLIP:  
The number of clips on an SD memory card when  
clips have been copied to an SD memory card.  
PROTECT:  
Write protected  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful playback functions  
Variable speed search  
Slow playback  
This function enables you to change the playback  
speed and search for specific scenes.  
During play, press one of the STILL ADV (  
) buttons on the remote control.  
or  
1
Press the Operation lever in the ► direction  
(playback) during playback.  
To return to normal playback, press PLAY ().  
On the remote control, press the VAR.  
SEARCH button.  
Fast forward/rewind playback  
During playback, push the Operation lever in  
INDEX  
ST OP  
INDEX  
the (rewind) or (fast-forward) direction.  
This performs fast forward/rewind playback at 4x  
speed.  
SELECT  
ST ORE  
VAR.  
PB  
.
SEARCH  
ZOOM  
E
SET  
OFF/ON  
P.B.DIGIT AL  
When this button is held down, the playback speed  
becomes faster (32x speed).  
Camera-recorder or  
Remote control  
P-IN-P  
/REW  
REC  
A.DUB  
FF/  
PL AY  
STILL  
V PAUS  
E
STILL  
V  
[1x] appears on the screen and the media is  
played back at the normal speed.  
INDEX  
DEX  
Camera-recorder or  
Remote control  
2
Press the PAGE/AUDIO MON/VAR button to  
change the playback speed.  
• The possible speeds are pause, 1/5x, 1x,  
2x, 4x, 12x, and 24x in forward/reverse. The  
current speed is incrementally increased with  
the + button and decreased with the – button.  
On the remote control, press REW () or FF  
().  
To return to normal playback, push the Operation  
lever in the direction (playback) or press PLAY  
() on the remote control.  
• Change the speed with the [ ] and [  
MENU buttons on the remote control.  
]
• Audio is not played back at speeds of 12x  
and 24x.  
Frame-by-frame playback  
INDEX  
ST OP  
INDEX  
1
2
Press (pause) during playback to set the  
unit to the pause mode.  
SELECT  
ST ORE  
VAR.  
PB  
.
SEARCH  
ZOOM  
MENU  
OFF/ON  
M  
P.B.DIGIT AL  
Press the PAGE/AUDIO MON/VAR button to  
play frame-by-frame.  
On the remote control, press the STILL ADV  
Camera-recorder or  
Remote control  
(
or  
) button.  
• Press and hold the button to perform frame-  
by-frame play continuously.  
To return to normal playback, push the Operation  
lever in the direction (playback) or press the  
VAR.SEARCH button on the remote control.  
/REW  
PLA Y  
FF/  
STILL AD  
V
PAUSE STILL AD  
V
IND
ST OP  
Camera-recorder or  
Remote control  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Useful playback functions (continued)  
Clip skip  
Viewing images on a TV/monitor  
You can view the images on a TV/monitor if you  
connect the unit to a monitor using a BNC cable  
(not included), an AV cable (not included), or an  
HDMI cable (not included).  
1
2
Press (pause) during playback to set the  
unit to the pause mode.  
Push the Operation lever in the   
(rewind) or (fast-forward) direction.  
1
2
Connect the camera-recorder to the TV set/  
monitor. (Page 104)  
P-IN-P  
REC  
A.DUB  
/REW  
PL AY  
FF/  
STILL  
A
V PAUS  
E
STILL  
V  
Start playback.  
INDEX  
DEX  
To display the information shown in the  
viewfinder or on the LCD monitor on a TV  
set/monitor connected with an AV cable,  
press the OSD button on the remote control.  
Press the OSD button again to clear the  
display. However, information displayed on  
video that is output from SDI OUT and HDMI  
OUT is set with SDI & HDMI CHAR on the  
setting menu OUTPUT SEL screen, not the  
OSD button.  
Camera-recorder or  
Remote control  
On the remote control, press REW () or FF  
().  
Setting SEEK SELECT on the setting menu  
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen to CLIP&T allows  
you to cue the start of the clip and the position a  
text memo is attached in sequence. (Page 152)  
START/  
DATE/ PHOTO  
TIME SHOT  
STOP  
OSD  
COUNTRSTITLE  
MULTI/  
ZOOM  
Adjusting the volume  
With the PAGE/AUDIO MON/VAR button, adjust  
the volume of the sound that is output from the  
internal speaker and headphone jack.  
On the remote control, press the ZOOM/VOL  
button.  
Checking the date and time  
Press the DATE/TIME button on the remote control  
to show the date and time of shooting on the  
screen. The display changes as follows each time  
you press the button.  
START/  
DATE/ PHOTO  
STOP  
OSD  
TIME  
SHOT  
Time  
COUNTER RESET  
MULTI/  
TITLE  
ZOOM  
P-IN-P  
REC  
A.DUB  
FF/  
START/  
Date  
/REW  
PLAY  
DATE/ PHOTO  
TIME SHOT  
STOP  
OSD  
COUNTER RESETL
MULTI/  
ZOOM  
Time and Date  
No display  
Camera-recorder or  
Remote control  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting external units  
Headphones  
3.5-mm stereo mini jack  
• Sound is no longer heard from the speaker when the headphones are connected.  
External microphone  
Microphone holder  
Microphone (optional)  
AG-MC200G  
Microphone  
holder adapter  
INPUT 1 or  
INPUT 2 terminal  
Screws for  
microphone  
holder 12 mm  
Screws for microphone  
holder 6 mm  
• When attaching an external microphone to the microphone shoe, use the supplied microphone holder  
and microphone holder adapter.  
• When attaching the microphone holder and the microphone holder adapter, be sure to tighten the screws  
firmly even though you might hear a squeaking sound.  
• Use the cable clamper of the microphone holder adapter to fix the microphone cable.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting external units (continued)  
Personal computer (non-linear editing/file transfer)  
File transfer/nonlinear editing  
Personal  
Computer  
USB cable (optional)  
Mini-B  
• “Procedures for making connections to a personal computer” (Page 109)  
• USB2.0 cable is not included with this camera. Please use a commercial USB2.0 cable (double-shielded  
for noise reduction).  
Hard disk drive (data copying)  
Hard disk drive  
USB2.0  
HOST  
USB cable (optional)  
• “Switching to the USB HOST mode” (Page 111)  
• USB2.0 cable is not included with this camera. Please use a commercial USB2.0 cable (double-shielded  
for noise reduction).  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Digital video equipment (Dubbing)  
Other Digital video equipment  
1394 cable  
(optional)  
6-pin  
Connect one of these cables to  
the terminal on the recorder.  
BNC cable (optional)  
• “Control of external devices through 1394 connection” (Page 106)  
• “Recording signals input to the DVCPRO/DV connector” (Page 105)  
• Please use a double-shielded IEEE1394 cable.  
AUTO REC function  
When recording is started or stopped on this camera-recorder, recording start/stop information can be  
output through the SDI (HD) connector to control external device.  
* The external device should support this function.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting external units (continued)  
TV/Monitor (playback/dubbing)  
BNC cable (optional)  
HDMI cable (optional)  
Video pin cable (optional)  
Connect one of these  
cables to the terminal on  
the television or monitor.  
TV/Monitor  
Audio pin cable (optional)  
White: CH1 (left channel) sound  
Red: CH2 (right channel) sound  
• VIERA Link is not supported. Please be aware that when using an HDMI cable and connecting this  
camera to a device that supports VIERA Link, the VIERA Link of other devices may not work in some  
cases.  
• From the HDMI OUT terminal, SD signals (480i, 576i) are converted to progressive signals (480P, 576P)  
then output.  
• Simultaneous display with the LCD monitor and the viewfinder is not possible when outputting video from  
the SDI OUT terminal.  
For simultaneous display, set SDI OUT on the setting menu OUTPUT SEL screen to OFF and EVF  
MODE on the DISPLAY SETUP screen to ON.  
• Please use a double-shielded SDI cable (optional).  
• Please use a double-shielded HDMI cable (optional).  
• It is recommended that you use a Panasonic HDMI cable.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections to the DVCPRO/DV connector  
Recording signals input to the  
DVCPRO/DV connector  
Signals that have the same format as that  
set in the menu options SYSTEM MODE  
and REC FORMAT in the SYSTEM SETUP  
screen should be input to the IEEE1394  
interface. A signal in a different format will  
not be correctly recorded on a P2 card.  
Video and audio recording and EE type  
video and audio of signal inputs other than  
1x speed playback signals may not work.  
· “Errors and warnings” (Page 126)  
Audio signal inputs are input signals from  
the DVCPRO/DV connector.  
32 kHz/4CH (12 bit) audio signals input via  
the IEEE1394 interface are recorded as  
48 kHz/4CH (16 bit) on a P2 card.  
It is not possible to use the GENLOCK IN  
connector to synchronize to an external  
reference signal.  
Signals output from the VIDEO OUT  
or AUDIO OUT connectors differ from  
actual input signals. Use such signals for  
monitoring.  
The following functions do not operate.  
· Pre-recording function  
· Loop recording function  
· Interval recording and one-shot recording  
function  
1
Connect a 1394 cable (DV cable).  
• “Precautions in 1394 connections” (Page 107)  
• Make sure that the signal format of the  
camera-recorder and the connected device is  
the same.  
2
To route inputs via the IEEE1394 interface,  
set the menu option REC SIGNAL in the  
SYSTEM SETUP screen to 1394.  
To use HD (1080i, 720P) set the menu option  
REC FORMAT in the SYSTEM SETUP  
screen to DVCPRO HD/60i (DVCPRO  
HD/50i) or DVCPRO HD/60P (DVCPRO  
HD/50P).  
The AVC-Intra format and DVCPRO HD  
native recording do not allow input via the  
IEEE1394 interface.  
3
4
Check that video from the IEEE 1394  
interface is displayed in the viewfinder or  
LCD monitor, and press the START/STOP  
button to begin recording.  
Press the START/STOP button again to stop  
recording.  
· One-clip recording function  
As well as those displayed in blue, there  
are other items on the setting menu for  
which the setting value cannot be changed.  
However, this is not a fault and these items  
are not related to this function.  
Time Code and User Bits  
• When input from the IEEE1394 interface is  
selected, the time code and user’s bit input from  
TC IN/OUT cannot be recorded on P2 card.  
• When input from the IEEE1394 interface is  
selected, the time code output from TC IN/OUT  
is not synchronized with the video signal output  
from the VIDEO OUT terminal.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections to the DVCPRO/DV connector (continued)  
Subcode area time codes and user bits  
Note the following when backup recording.  
• When input from the IEEE1394 interface is  
selected and the time code is set to free run, the  
subcode area time code input from the DVCPRO/  
DV terminal can be recorded on P2 card.  
To record user bits input from the DVCPRO/DV  
connector on a P2 card, set the menu option UB  
MODE in RECORDING SETUP to EXT.  
• Menu settings are retained even if you turn the  
power off. So if you use the camera-recorder  
with the settings for backup recording still  
in effect, images on media in any unit that  
connected may be overwritten.  
After backup recording, check the menu item  
settings before you operate the camera-  
recorder.  
• If you use another AG-HPX250P/EN as the  
external unit for backup recording, select  
“OFF” for 1394 CONTROL on the external unit  
and set REC SIGNAL to “1394” on the setting  
menu SYSTEM SETUP screen.  
• Backup recording may not work properly if you  
connect two or more external units.  
• Use a 1394 cable of 4.5 m or less for  
connection.  
VAUX area time codes and user bits  
When input from the IEEE1394 interface is  
selected, time code and user bits of the VAUX area  
input from the DVCPRO/DV connector is recorded  
on a P2 card regardless of camera-recorder menu  
settings and switch positions.  
Recording UMID (Unique Material Identifier)  
data  
When input from the IEEE1394 interface is  
selected, UMID data input via the DVCPRO/  
DV connector is recorded on a P2 card. When  
no UMID data is available, the camera-recorder  
generates and records such data.  
• Set the external unit up to receive 1394 signals  
before backup recording.  
You can have a media in the external unit start  
recording automatically when the media in this  
unit is almost finished. Set 1394 CONTROL on  
the setting menu OTHER FUNCTIONS screen  
(Page 151) to “CHAIN”.  
UMID data is not recorded when the camera-  
recorder is operating in the DV mode.  
• Note that images are recorded even when you  
perform a rec check.  
Control of external devices through  
1394 connection  
Connecting an external device for backup recording  
to the DVCPRO/DV connector allows the operator  
to control start and stop recording from the camera-  
recorder.  
1
Connect a 1394 cable (DV cable).  
• “Precautions in 1394 connections” (Page 107)  
• Set 1394 CONTROL in the setting menu  
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen to BOTH.  
2
Use the setting menu 1394 CMD SEL  
(OTHER FUNCTIONS) to select the  
command for terminating recording that  
external devices receive.  
• For details on menu operation, refer to “Using  
the setup menus” (Page 28 of Vol. 1).  
3
Recording can be started and stopped  
for both this unit and external devices by  
pressing the START/STOP button on this  
unit.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions in 1394 connections  
External devices cannot be controlled via  
1394 connection when AVC-Intra format or  
DVCPRO HD native recording is selected.  
Backup recording does not work in three  
of the special recording modes: Interval  
recording, One-shot recording and Loop  
recording. (Page 44 – 46)  
Please note that when performing backup  
recording to a connected external device  
with the time code of this unit set to REC  
RUN, continuing recording when there is  
no more free space on the P2 card inserted  
into this unit causes the time code output  
from the DVCPRO/DV terminal to halt.  
Backup recording may not be performed by  
external devices if you perform recording  
start → stop → recording start in quick  
succession.  
• The camera-recorder does not supply power via  
the cable.  
• Observe the following in connections using a  
1394 cable.  
· Connect this unit to only one other device.  
· Do not expose the DVCPRO/DV connector to  
excessive force when connecting a 1394 cable  
to avoid damaging the connector.  
· If an error (1394 INITIAL ERROR) should occur  
when making a connection, reinsert the 1394  
cable or turn the camera-recorder off and then  
turn it back on again.  
· Make sure that the camera-recorder and all  
connected devices are connected to ground  
(or connected to a common ground). If the  
equipment cannot be connected to ground, turn  
off all connected devices before connecting or  
disconnecting an IEEE1394 cable.  
· When connecting the unit to a device with a  
4-pin connector, connect the cable to the 6-pin  
connector on the camera-recorder first.  
• Be sure to properly connect the 1394 cable to  
the DVCPRO/DV connector on a computer with a  
6-pin connector. Note that inserting the plug the  
wrong way round may damage the connector.  
6-pin type 4-pin type  
• AV signals may be disrupted when connected  
devices are turned on and off or when the  
interface cable is connected or disconnected.  
• It may take the system a few seconds to stabilize  
after switching input signals or changing modes.  
Start recording after the system has stabilized.  
• The AUDIO LEVEL control does not work in  
recordings that involve IEEE1394 interface input  
or output signals.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections to the DVCPRO/DV connector (continued)  
• Observe the following precautions when  
controlling a P2 memory card camera-recorder  
using PC application software (editing software).  
· Recording cannot be inserted to a portion within  
a clip. It can only be appended to the end of the  
newest clip.  
· Do not open the thumbnail screen during  
application software operation as this may  
prevent normal software operation.  
• Unprocessed video and audio signals are  
output via the IEEE1394 interface during special  
playback. When monitored on another device,  
these video and audio signals may sound  
different than when played back on this unit.  
• A DV or DVCPRO output format makes it  
possible to select audio channel CH1/CH2 or  
CH3/CH4 output from the IEEE1394 interface in  
the menu option 1394 AUDIO OUT in the AUDIO  
SETUP screen.  
• When recording a signal from an external device,  
do not halt output at the external device or  
disconnect the cable as the device may not be  
recognized when recording is recommenced.  
• When recording a signal from an external device,  
do not change the output format used by the  
external device as recording cannot be correctly  
performed.  
• The automatic recording function on DVD devices  
may not function correctly. In such cases, please  
record manually.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Nonlinear editing with P2 card (PC mode: USB device)  
A USB 2.0 connection to a computer or other  
device allows you to use P2 cards in the camera-  
recorder as mass storage.  
4
Turn the POWER/MODE switch to the MODE  
position to illuminate the PB/THUMBNAIL  
lamp, and then turn and hold it.  
Procedures for making connections  
to a personal computer  
1
Connect a USB cable to the USB 2.0  
connector.  
• The PC lamp illuminates, the camera enters  
PC mode, and video/audio output stops.  
You cannot switch to PC mode directly from  
CAMERA mode. Leaves the thumbnail  
screen of PB/THUMBNAIL mode.  
A USB 2.0 cable is not supplied with the  
AG-HPX250P/EN. Use a commercially  
available USB cable (with shielding or  
other noise-reduction measures) that  
supports USB 2.0. (Page 102)  
To make a USB connection, you must first install  
the P2 software on the supplied CD-ROM on the  
computer. Select the “AG-HPX250” driver. This  
USB driver supports only the Windows operating  
system. For details, refer to the installation manual.  
USB 2.0 Connector  
(DEVICE)  
A USB driver must be installed on the  
computer.  
Use a computer that supports USB 2.0  
since the camera-recorder supports only  
USB 2.0.  
Connect only one camera-recorder to a  
personal computer via USB.  
Do not remove P2 cards when the camera-  
recorder is connect to a personal computer  
via USB.  
In a USB connection, the P2 CARD ACCESS  
LED is on only when the card is accessed.  
In USB device operation, recording,  
playback and clip thumbnail operations are  
not available.  
The free space and status of P2 cards is  
not displayed when operating as a USB  
device, and video/audio cannot be output  
or displayed.  
2
3
Select USB Device in PC MODE SELECT on  
the setting menu SYSTEM SETUP screen,  
and press SET on the Operation lever.  
• Refer to the section “Using the setup menus”  
(Page 28 of Vol. 1) for menu operation.  
SYSTEM SETUP  
SYSTEM MODE  
REC SIGNAL  
1080-59.9i  
CAMERA  
DVCPROHD/60i  
24PA  
REC FORMAT  
CAMERA MODE  
SCAN REVERSE  
OFF  
ASPECT CONV LETTER BOX  
SETUP  
PC MODE SE  
7.5%A  
USB DEVICE  
LECT  
PUSH MENU TO RETURN  
Press MENU twice to exit the menus.  
(Continued on the next page)  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Nonlinear editing with P2 card (PC mode: USB device) (continued)  
• When a USB connection is present the PC  
operation lamp illuminates, and “USB DEVICE  
CONNECT” appears in the center of the  
viewfinder or LCD monitor. When connection is  
not correctly, “DISCONNECT” appears in the  
viewfinder.  
• In USB device mode, clips on P2 cards can be  
displayed but video from the camera-recorder or  
an external device cannot be recorded.  
Mode lamp (PC)  
POWER/MODE switch  
(Viewfinder display)  
USB DEVICE  
CONNECT  
5
Terminating USB device mode.  
• Set the camera-recorder POWER/MODE  
switch to OFF.  
You cannot return to CAMERA mode or PB/  
THUMBNAIL mode from USB device mode.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a hard disk drive (PC mode: USB host)  
In this mode, it is possible to connect to a hard disk  
drive (HDD), store card data (EXPORT): Refer to  
“Writing data on a hard disk drive” (Page 115), view  
thumbnails of stored clips (EXPLORE): Refer to  
“Viewing hard disk drive information” (Page 112), and  
write data back to P2 cards (IMPORT): Refer to  
“Writing data back to P2 cards” (Page 116).  
USB HOST display  
Switching to the USB HOST mode  
In USB HOST mode, clips on P2 cards can  
1
Select USB HOST in PC MODE SELECT on  
the setting menu SYSTEM SETUP screen,  
and press SET on the Operation lever.  
• Refer to the section “Using the setup menus”  
be displayed but video from the camera-  
recorder or an external device cannot be  
recorded.  
Clips written to a hard disk must be written  
back to a P2 card before it can be played  
back.  
· “Writing data back to P2 cards” (Page 116)  
You cannot return to standard mode from  
USB HOST mode. Turn the power off and  
then turn it back on again.  
(Page 28 of Vol. 1) for menu operation.  
SYSTEM SETUP  
SYSTEM MODE  
REC SIGNAL  
1080-59.9i  
CAMERA  
DVCPROHD/60i  
24PA  
REC FORMAT  
CAMERA MODE  
SCAN REVERSE  
OFF  
ASPECT CONV LETTER BOX  
SETUP  
PC MODE SE  
USB HOST  
USB DEVICE  
LECT  
PUSH MENU TO RETURN  
2
3
Press MENU twice to exit the menus.  
Turn the POWER/MODE switch to the MODE  
position to illuminate the PB/THUMBNAIL  
lamp, and then turn and hold it.  
• The PC lamp illuminates, the camera enters  
PC mode, and it goes to the thumbnail  
screen.  
• When a hard disk drive is connected, the  
HDD indication in the upper right corner  
stays illuminated. However, if this indicator  
illuminates red, it means that the hard disk  
drive is not in a usable state. Confirm the  
HDD type/state.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a hard disk drive (PC mode: USB host) (continued)  
Using the USB HOST mode  
Viewing hard disk drive information  
Usable hard disk drives  
You can view the information on the hard disk drive  
connected via USB with the following steps.  
• Hard disk drives connectable via USB 2.0  
• The units compatible with the storage unit that  
has Panasonic USB I/F  
Refer to the support site at the following Website  
for the compatible units.  
1
Switch the mode to USB HOST.  
• “Switching to the USB HOST mode” (Page 111)  
• The thumbnail screen is displayed.  
(USB HOST is displayed in the bottom right.)  
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/  
2
3
Connect the hard disk drive to the camera-  
recorder via USB 2.0.  
While the USB HOST mode supports USB  
bus power (5 V, 0.5 A), some hard disk  
drives may not activate. If this is the case,  
power must be supplied in a different way.  
Do not connect more than one drive even  
through a hub or any other device. Even  
with devices other than a hard disk drive,  
do not connect to the drive together with  
the hard disk drive through a hub.  
The unit does not support a hard disk drive  
of 2 TB (2048 GB) or more.  
Press the MENU button and select HDD →  
EXPLORE from the thumbnail menu.  
The screen provides the information about the  
hard disk drive.  
For Type S or P2 STORE  
To prevent copying or formatting problems  
from occurring during connection to a  
hard disk drive, be sure that the camera’s  
battery is sufficiently charged or use the  
AC adaptor.  
Press the EXIT button. Press the SET button.  
Versions 2.** and later of the P2 STORE  
(AJ-PCS060G) support USB host mode for  
this unit.  
Versions 1.** cannot connect. Please  
upgrade.  
For the FAT  
Press the EXIT button. Press the SET button.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. PARTITION  
7. PARTITION #  
This section indicates the type of the hard disk  
drive.  
This section indicates the partition number (one  
P2 card is used as a unit) on the hard disk drive.  
The available functions depend on the type of  
hard disk drive.  
The screen can show up to 10 partitions.  
If there are more than 10 partitions, push  
the Operation lever in the ▼ direction  
and scroll down to display the remaining  
partitions.  
HDD type  
Feature  
Available functions  
TYPE S A special format that  
allows high-speed  
Thumbnail viewing,  
writing and writing back  
writing and writing back on a card basis, writing  
on a card-by-card basis. back on a clip basis,  
A drive formatted with  
the camera-recorder  
uses this format.  
and formatting  
8. MODEL  
This section indicates the model of the P2 card  
that originally contained data on the partition.  
P2  
STORE  
P2 STORE (AJ-  
PCS060G).  
No writing can be  
performed.  
Thumbnail viewing,  
writing back on a card  
basis, and writing back  
on a clip basis  
You can switch to PARTITION NAME by  
pushing the Operation lever in the ►  
direction. Push the Operation lever in the  
◄ direction to return to the original model  
name display.  
FAT  
For a hard disk drive  
with the first primary  
partition formatted in  
FAT 16 or 32, as seen  
Thumbnail viewing,  
reading on a clip basis,  
and formatting  
* Once formatted, the  
on personal computers, hard disk drive can be  
etc., which requires a treated as a TYPE-S  
CONTENTS directory at HDD.  
its root.  
OTHER Hard disk drives not  
described above.  
Formatting  
* Once formatted, they  
can be treated as a  
TYPE-S HDD.  
* They are hard disk  
drives that have no  
CONTENTS directory or  
use the NTFS and any  
other file system instead  
of FAT 16 or 32.  
9. DATE/TIME  
This section indicates the date and time the  
data on the partition was recorded.  
2. VENDOR  
This section indicates the vendor for the hard  
disk drive.  
10. SERIAL  
This section indicates the serial number of the  
P2 card that originally contained the data on  
the partition.  
3. MODEL  
This section indicates the model of the hard disk  
drive.  
(Continued on the next page)  
4. SIZE  
This section indicates the total storage on the  
hard disk drive.  
5. USED  
This section indicates the used space on the  
hard disk drive (in GB) and the number of P2  
cards in use.  
6. FREE CAP.  
This section indicates the remaining free space  
on the hard disk drive in GB.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a hard disk drive (PC mode: USB host) (continued)  
11. VERIFY  
Formatting a hard disk drive  
This section indicates the verification setting  
and results at the time the data on the partition  
was recorded.  
1
Switch the mode to USB HOST.  
• “Switching to the USB HOST mode” (Page 111)  
• The thumbnail screen is displayed.  
ON:FINISHED :  
Verification was performed and the results  
agreed.  
(USB HOST is displayed in the bottom right.)  
2
3
Connect the hard disk drive via USB.  
ON:FAILED :  
Verification was performed and the results  
did not agree.  
Press the MENU button and select HDD →  
EXPLORE from the thumbnail menu.  
The display provides a screen that shows the  
information about the hard disk drive.  
OFF :  
No verification was performed.  
- - - :  
4
From the thumbnail menu, select  
OPERATION → FORMAT (HDD) and select  
YES using the Operation lever. Then, the  
confirmation message is displayed again.  
Select YES.  
No verification information is available.  
Even for a FAT-type hard disk drive, the  
1001st or later clips are not shown.  
For a FAT-formatted hard disk drive, the  
information about only the first partition  
is shown.  
For a P2 STORE (AJ-PCS060G) that  
The camera-recorder starts formatting the hard  
disk drive. Once formatted, the hard disk drive  
can be treated as a TYPE-S HDD.  
has an invalid partition, that partition  
information is shown in gray.  
Formatting a hard disk drive erases  
all contents of it. Note that you cannot  
erase the contents of certain partitions  
by specifying them.  
Operation of the hard disk drive with  
this unit, and the data in the hard disk  
drive are not guaranteed if a hard disk  
drive formatted by this unit is rewritten  
using another PC or similar.  
12. NAME  
This section indicates the PARTITION NAME.  
Enter the PARTITION NAME from the software  
keyboard by selecting [CHANGE PARTITION  
NAME] in the OPERATION MENU while the  
thumbnail of the hard disk drive is displayed.  
(Max. 20 characters)  
Data erased by formatting cannot be  
restored, so be sure to perform the  
format after first confirming the data.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Writing data on a hard disk drive  
For a Type-S hard disk drive, data can be  
written on a card basis. The data on up  
to 23 P2 cards can be stored on the hard  
disk drive. The data set on each P2 card is  
recognized as a separate drive by the PC.  
If data on a P2 card that contains a  
defective clip must be written to a hard  
disk drive, then we recommend fixing or  
deleting that clip before writing the data.  
When the process is diskontinued during  
verification, the data on the P2 card has  
been written to the hard disk drive.  
1
Switch the mode to USB HOST.  
• “Switching to the USB HOST mode” (Page 111)  
• The thumbnail screen is displayed.  
(USB HOST is displayed in the bottom right.)  
2
Connect a hard disk drive via USB.  
A hard disk drive that has not been formatted  
with the camera-recorder must be formatted  
as directed in “Formatting a hard disk drive”  
(Page 114).  
3
4
Insert a P2 card.  
Press the MENU button and select HDD →  
EXPORT from the thumbnail menu.  
Specify the slot that contains the P2 card  
bearing the data to be written to the hard disk  
drive.  
5
Select YES.  
• This starts the write process.  
• When the data is being written, a progress  
bar is displayed. To discontinue writing,  
press the SET button on the Operation lever  
instead of cancellation confirmation.  
• When the writing is completed, the message  
“COPY COMPLETED!” is displayed.  
To disable verification at the time of  
writing, select HDD → SETUP from the  
thumbnail menu and set the option  
VERIFY to OFF. This speeds up writing  
without verifying data writing.  
Select ALL SLOT to write data  
collectively onto all P2 cards currently  
inserted in the unit to the hard disk  
drive.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a hard disk drive (PC mode: USB host) (continued)  
Writing data back to P2 cards  
Selecting clips from the thumbnail  
menu  
Selecting clips on the hard disk drive  
For a Type-S or P2 STORE hard disk drive, you  
can write data back to a P2 card with the same  
model number on a card basis. The target P2 cards  
must be preformatted.  
You can select clips on the hard disk drive to be  
written back to P2 cards.  
1
Switch the mode to USB HOST.  
• “Switching to the USB HOST mode” (Page 111)  
• The thumbnail screen is displayed.  
1
Switch the mode to USB HOST.  
• “Switching to the USB HOST mode” (Page 111)  
• The thumbnail screen is displayed.  
(USB HOST is displayed in the bottom right.)  
(USB HOST is displayed in the bottom right.)  
2
3
4
Connect a hard disk drive via USB.  
Insert the target P2 card in a slot.  
2
3
4
Connect a hard disk drive via USB.  
Insert the target P2 cards in slots.  
Press the MENU button and select HDD →  
EXPLORE from the thumbnail menu. Move  
to the appropriate partition and select it  
with the SET button on the Operation lever.  
Press the MENU button and select HDD →  
EXPLORE from the thumbnail menu. Move  
to the appropriate partition and select it  
with the SET button on the Operation lever.  
5
6
From among the thumbnails, select the  
clips to be written to the P2 card.  
5
6
From the thumbnail menu, select  
OPERATION → IMPORT. Then, specify  
the slots that contain the empty target P2  
cards.  
Press the MENU button and select  
OPERATION → COPY. Then, specify the  
slot that contains the target P2 card.  
Select YES.  
7
Select YES.  
• This starts the write process.  
• When the writing is completed, the message  
“COPY COMPLETED!” is displayed.  
• This starts the data write to the P2 card.  
• When the writing is completed, the message  
“COPY COMPLETED!” is displayed.  
<For your information>  
To disable verification during writing, select  
HDD → SETUP from the thumbnail menu and  
set the option VERIFY to OFF. This speeds up  
writing without verifying data writing.  
When only selected files are written, no  
verification is performed.  
Copy data in clip units from cards with a  
different model number as data cannot be  
imported by the partition between such  
cards. Copy data by clip.  
If a clip is written back to a P2 card different  
from the original card that contained that  
clip, then the clip may be incomplete. If this  
is the case, reconnect the clip.  
• “Reconnection of incomplete clips” (Page 85)  
Copy data in clip units from cards with a  
different model number as data cannot be  
imported by the partition between such  
cards. Copy data by clip.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Direction for using a hard disk drive  
Warning and error display for thumbnail  
operation and USB HOST MODE  
• A hard disk drive (including the P2 STORE (AJ-  
PCS060G)) must be used under the following  
conditions:  
· It must meet the operating requirements (e.g.  
temperature).  
Thumbnails  
Message  
Description/Measure  
· It must not be placed in an instable place or a  
place exposed to vibrations.  
• Some hard disk drives and cables do not operate  
properly.  
• Some hard disk drives with the SATA (Serial ATA)  
interface or the PATA (Parallel ATA) interface  
connected by a USB conversion cable may not  
be recognized.  
• When copying data, a hard disk drive must have  
sufficient free space.  
CANNOT ACCESS!  
Data cannot be accessed because it is  
corrupted or for other reasons.  
Restore media and clips to normal state before  
access.  
CANNOT CHANGE!  
With the AVC-Intra100 or AVC-Intra50, clips for  
which thumbnails cannot be created, and for  
which the  
mark is displayed cannot have  
the thumbnail for their text memo position  
changed.  
Please set the SYSTEM MODE item to match  
the clip. The menu item SYSTEM MODE is  
found on the setting menu SYSTEM SETUP  
screen. (Page 135)  
• Please be aware that removing the cable or  
destination P2 card during format or copy, or  
turning off the power of this camera or hard disk  
drive can cause corruption of data and faults on  
the P2 card and camera. Furthermore, ensure  
that the unit is fully charged, or use an external  
DC power source.  
• Since hard disk drives are high precision devices,  
there is a high possibility that they may become  
incapable of writing data depending on the  
conditions of use.  
CANNOT COPY!  
Images cannot be copied.  
Check the conditions for copying.  
CANNOT DELETE!  
Contents version mismatch prevents deletion.  
Match devices and contents version.  
Take note that we will not be liable for loss  
of data caused by failed hard disk drives or  
any other problem as well as direct or indirect  
damages resulting from the loss of data.  
• We do not guarantee that hard disk drives will  
operate properly with the camera-recorder or that  
the data on them will be properly retained if data  
copied to them from the camera-recorder has  
been replaced with other data using a PC.  
• By using the drive mount converter distributed  
on the following URL, the hard disk drive can  
be mounted in the designated folder when  
connected.  
CANNOT FORMAT!  
P2 card problem prevents formatting.  
Check P2 card.  
CANNOT RECONNECT!  
A clip that does not span multiple cannot be  
reconnected.  
Check selected content.  
CANNOT REPAIR!  
Data cannot be repaired since content that  
cannot be repaired is selected.  
Check selected content.  
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/  
LACK OF CAPACITY!  
There is not enough recording capacity left on  
the card.  
Insert a card with sufficient recording capacity.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using a hard disk drive (PC mode: USB host) (continued)  
Soft keyboard  
MISSING CLIP!  
A shot mark will be added to the clips recorded  
on multiple P2 cards when all P2 cards are not  
inserted yet.  
Message  
Description/Measure  
CANNOT CHANGE!  
Insert all P2 cards with recorded clips, and  
[PERSON] will be entered while the text memo  
is not available.  
Enter [TEXT] before entering [PERSON].  
confirm that the  
disappear, and then add shot marks.  
incomplete clip indicators  
NO CARD!  
No P2 or SD card is inserted.  
Insert compatible media.  
CANNOT SET!  
INVALID VALUE!  
The entered value is incorrect.  
Change the value.  
NO COPY TO SAME CARD!  
A clip cannot be copied to the card storing the  
original clip.  
Copy the selected clip to a card that does not  
contain the original clip.  
HDD (USB HOST MODE)  
Message  
Description/Measure  
NO FILE!  
The designated file is not found.  
Check the file.  
CANNOT ACCESS CARD!  
An error occurred during P2 card access.  
Check P2 card.  
SAME CLIP IS SELECTED!  
Images cannot be copied since the clip has  
already been copied from the original clip.  
Confirm the selected clip and release either  
the source clip or the destination clip and then  
execute the copy operation.  
CANNOT ACCESS TARGET!  
An error occurred during hard disk access.  
Check hard disk status and connection.  
CANNOT FORMAT!  
The hard disk cannot be initialized.  
Connect another hard disk drive.  
TOO MANY CLIPS!  
The number of clips on the copy target card  
exceeds 1000.  
Reduce the number of selected clips.  
CANNOT RECOGNIZE HDD!  
The destination target cannot be properly  
recognized.  
UNKNOWN CONTENTS FORMAT!  
Warning displayed to indicate contents version  
mismatch.  
Reboot the hard disk or connect a different  
hard disk.  
CARD IS EMPTY!  
CANNOT COPY!  
Match devices and contents version.  
UNKNOWN DATA!  
The P2 selected for copying is empty.  
Copying is not performed since the card is  
empty.  
The metadata character code is invalid.  
Use UTF-8 for the metadata character code.  
Use the viewer to enter correct characters.  
FORMAT P2 CARD!  
USER CLIP NAME MODIFIED!  
Characters in the clip name had to be deleted  
in adding the counter value.  
The user clip name plus the counter value can  
only contain up to 100 bytes. Characters in the  
clip name are automatically deleted when the  
total exceeds 100 bytes.  
This warning indicates that data could not  
be imported from a hard disk to a P2 card  
because the P2 card contained recorded data.  
You cannot copy to a P2 card that contains  
data.  
Format the card on a P2 device and copy  
again.  
WRITE PROTECTED!  
The P2 or SD card is write protected.  
Insert write-enabled media.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LACK OF CAPACITY!  
Not enough space left on the hard disk.  
There is not enough space on the connected  
hard disk. Use a new hard disk or formatted  
hard disk.  
HDD DISCONNECTED!  
The unit is not connected to a hard disk.  
Reconnect the USB cable. If the hard disk  
does not operate normally, turn it off and turn it  
back on again.  
MISMATCH COMPONENT!  
Copying is not possible since the model  
number of the destination card does not match  
that of the source card.  
Use a P2 card with the same model number or  
copy video in clip units.  
TOO MANY PARTITIONS!  
There are too many partitions.  
Hard disks can handle up to 23 partitions. Use  
a new hard disk or formatted hard disk.  
TOO MANY TARGETS!  
Multiple devices are connected.  
Disconnect devices, turn off the unit and turn it  
back on again.  
UNKNOWN DEVICE CONNECTED!  
The connected DVD drive is not compatible.  
Disconnect devices, turn off the unit and turn it  
back on again.  
VERIFICATION FAILED!  
The compare check after copying failed.  
Copy the data again.  
• For details on the error display of “Screen  
displays”, see “Errors and warnings” (Page 126).  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Screen displays  
Selecting viewfinder display  
information  
Viewfinder screen status displays  
In addition to video, the viewfinder or LCD monitor  
shows messages indicating camera-recorder  
settings and operating status, center markers,  
safety zone markers, zebra patterns and other  
indications.  
To select items in the viewfinder screen, open the  
DISPLAY SETUP screen and turn on or off each  
item or type.  
• For details on menu operation, refer to “Using the  
setup menus” (Page 28 of Vol. 1).  
Viewfinder status indication layout  
DISPLAY SETUP  
The illustration below shows the indications  
(except MODE CHECK) that are displayed in the  
viewfinder.  
EVF PEAK LEVEL  
EVF PEAK FREQ  
EVF SETTING  
EVF B. LIGHT  
EVF COLOR  
0
LOW  
>>>  
NORMAL  
ON  
EVF MODE  
AUTO  
70%  
85%  
ZEBRA1 DETECT  
ZEBRA2 DETECT  
T C 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6 : 2 3  
1 2 1 9 9 9 min  
P 2  
1
L A C K  
A
I
-
P A U S E  
- C L I  
P
U S E R - 1  
D 5 x  
PUSH MENU TO RETURN  
1394  
F B C  
1 0 8 0 i  
100  
AVC-I  
60  
P 3 .2K  
0
dB  
L T . BOX  
ND 1 / 1 6  
8 3% ND 1 / 4  
R
6 0 : 2 4 P N  
S E P 2 5 2 0 1 1 2 3 : 5 9 : 5 9  
A L CH 12  
= = = = = = = =  
A . R E C  
DR S  
1/ 2 5 0  
S PO T MF 2 3 . 5 f  
t
CH 1  
CH 2  
F 5 . 6 Z 1 0 . 4 mm  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Screen displays  
33  
32  
31  
30 29  
28  
1
2
3
T C 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6 : 2 3  
1 2 1 9 9 9 min  
27  
26  
25  
P 2  
F U L L  
P - P A U S E 1 - C L I P  
U S E R - 1  
D5 X  
A
1394  
F B C  
4
1 0 8 0 i  
100  
AVC-I  
60  
5
7
6
P 3 .2K  
24  
23  
0
dB  
8
L T . BOX  
ND 1 / 16  
22  
21  
8 3% ND 1 / 4  
R
9
10  
6 0 : 2 4 P N  
S E P 2 5 2 0 1 1 2 3 : 5 9 : 5 9  
20  
19  
11  
12  
A L C H 1 2  
A . R EC  
DR S  
1/ 2 5 0  
S PO T MF 2 3 . 5 f t  
CH 1  
CH 2  
= = = = = = = =  
F 5 . 6  
Z 1 0 . 4 mm  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
1
Time code displays  
UB:  
Each press of the COUNTER button displays  
(or turns off) the indications listed below.  
(No indication)  
User bit values  
UB* is indicated when the user bit value  
cannot be correctly read from DVCPRO/DV  
connector input.  
Counter:  
Counter value (during recording only)  
CLIP:  
FR:  
Frame rate information for recording  
FR60I -: 60i interlace mode  
(60 fields/s)  
FR60P -: 60P progressive mode  
(60 fields/s)  
Clip Counter value (during recording only)  
Clip Counter value during each shooting  
session.  
CLIP is indicated when set REC COUNTER  
on the setting menu DISPLAY SETUP screen  
to CLIP.  
FR30P -: 30P progressive mode  
(30 fields/s)  
TC:  
FR24P *: 24P progressive mode  
(24 fields/s)  
Time code value  
TC* is indicated when the time code value  
cannot be correctly read from DVCPRO/DV  
connector input.  
The colon between the seconds and the  
frames changes to a period (.) in drop frame  
mode.  
FR24PA *: 24P advanced mode  
(24 fields/s)  
FR50I:  
FR50P:  
FR25P:  
50I interlace mode  
(50 fields/s)  
50P progressive mode  
(50 fields/s)  
25P progressive mode  
(25 fields/s)  
tc:  
Time code value (frame digits are indicated  
in 24 frames)  
tc* is indicated when the time code value  
cannot be correctly read from DVCPRO/DV  
connector input.  
The colon between the seconds and the  
frames changes to a period (.) in drop frame  
mode.  
* In FR24P and FR24PA modes, the last digit  
contains the frame conversion sequence  
information.  
When TC, tc and UB are locked to TC IN  
input, the characters in their icons change to  
outline characters  
.
TC  
TC  
(Continued on the next page)  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Screen displays (continued)  
2
Warnings  
6
Information display  
REMOTE:  
Flashes when device settings of wireless  
remote control are different.  
The following information is displayed  
depending on the situation.  
• Performance of auto white balance and auto  
black balance  
P2  
:
Blinks when no P2 card is inserted or the  
card is write protected.  
• Warning and error indication  
• Information on switch and button operations  
• “MODE CHECK indication” (Page 131)  
P2  
FULL:  
Blinks when there is no more space left on  
the P2 card.  
7
8
System frequency display  
: Indicates in 59.94 Hz mode  
: Indicates in 50 Hz mode  
60  
50  
P2  
LACK:  
Blinks in loop rec mode when there is not  
enough space left on the P2 card.  
Letter box recording display  
This display appears in the 480i (576i)  
recording format when LETTER BOX is  
selected in the menu option ASPECT CONV in  
the SYSTEM SETUP screen.  
:
Lights when the battery for the internal clock  
is depleted.  
• “Charging the built-in battery” (Page 27 of  
Vol. 1)  
9
Y GET brightness display  
When the Y GET function is used, the image  
level at the center of the image is indicated in a  
range between 0% and 109%.  
3
Backup unit displays  
The following indications show the status of  
backup units connected to the DVCPRO/DV  
connector.  
The following indications are not displayed  
when the menu option 1394 CONTROL in the  
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen is set to OFF.  
1394 : Recording  
10 Recording/playback frame rate display  
In native recording, the capture frame rate  
and recording and playback frame rates are  
displayed.  
Example: 60:24PN (recording 60P with the  
camera-recorder frame rate set to a  
variable frame rate of 24PN)  
Playback applies a 2:3 pull-down to perform  
24P over 60P, indicating that 24/60 speed slow  
playback is performed.  
1394 : Recording standby  
1394  
: The backup unit cannot be  
controlled.  
1394  
: No backup unit is connected.  
1394 – – : A backup unit is connected but  
is not in recording or recording  
standby status.  
In standard recording only the capture frame  
rate is indicated.  
Example: 24PA (recording 24PA using 2:3:3:2  
pulldown for over 60i recording)  
4
Recording format and system frequency  
indication  
1080i  
11 Audio limiter display  
720P  
480i  
This is displayed when the limiter is set to work  
on CH1, CH2 or CH3, CH4.  
576i  
Recording format  
In 1080i, 720P system mode  
AVC-I 100: AVC-Intra 100 format  
AVC-I 50: AVC-Intra 50 format  
DVCPROHD: DVCPRO HD format  
In 480 (576i) system mode  
DVCPRO50, DVCPRO, DV  
5
AUTO/MANUAL switch indicator  
Indicates when the AUTO/MANUAL switch is  
set to AUTO.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 Audio level meter display  
(Only for AG-HPX250P)  
19 Focus control display  
Displays the focus control information with 99-  
00. In the auto focus mode, AF appears. In the  
manual focus mode, MF appears, and when  
MF ASSIST is set to ON on the setting menu  
SW MODE screen, MA appears. When the  
display is set to macro control, the black and  
white of AF or MF are displayed in reverse.  
95 (Distance to the subject: infinity)  
-20dB -12dB  
0dB  
CH 1  
CH 2  
(Only for AG-HPX250EN)  
-18dB -12dB  
0dB  
CH 1  
CH 2  
By assigning MAG A. LVL (level meter  
magnification) to a USER button makes it  
possible to switch to display magnification.  
• “Audio level meter magnification” (Page 55)  
Also, you can switch between level meter  
display and audio output (excluding 1394) for  
CH1/2 and CH3/4 while the USER button to  
which LVL METER has been allocated is held  
down.  
:
00 (Distance to the subject: approx. 5 cm)  
Depending on the zoom position, the macro  
range may not be enabled. Also, depending  
on the zoom position, the lower limit value of  
macro range may be different.  
The units can be switched between feet and  
m in the ZOOM·FOCUS option of the setting  
menu DISPLAY SETUP screen.  
• “Using the USER buttons” (Page 39)  
20 Calendar  
13 Audio recording not possible display  
This is displayed when audio recording is not  
possible during VFR (variable frame rate)  
mode native recording, interval recording, and  
one-shot recording.  
Month:  
JAN (January), FEB (February), MAR (March),  
APR (April), MAY (May), JUN (June), JUL(July),  
AUG (August), SEP (September), OCT  
(October), NOV (November), DEC (December)  
Day of the month  
14 Shutter speed  
Year: 2000…2037  
Hours  
The shutter speed is displayed here.  
In synchro scan mode, the display (time  
(minutes) display or shutter angle icon display)  
made in the menu option SYNC SCAN TYPE  
in the SCENE FILE screen is used.  
Minutes  
Seconds  
mmm dd yyyy hh:mm:ss  
R
Indicates time stamp record  
15 DRS display  
This indicates operation of the dynamic range  
stretcher function.  
21 Recommended ND filter display  
This indicates the most suitable ND filter to use  
under current shooting conditions.  
16 Iris display  
Displays F values.  
22 ND filter display  
This indicates the selected ND filter.  
17 Auto-iris control displays  
STD: Standard auto iris control  
SPOT: Auto iris control for spot light  
BACK: Auto iris control for backlight  
compensation  
23 Gain display  
Indicates the gain value set using the video  
amplifier.  
24 WHITE BAL switch position indication  
Indicates the currently selected switch position  
and also white balance operation when AWB is  
preset. In ATW (Auto Tracking White Balance)  
mode, ATW is also indicated and LOCK is  
displayed when the function is locked.  
18 Zoom position display  
Zoom positions are indicated in a range from  
Z00 (maximum wide angle) to Z99 (maximum  
zoom).  
You can switch the units to mm in  
ZOOM·FOCUS on the setting menu DISPLAY  
SETUP screen.  
25 FBC indication  
Appears when the FBC function is engaged.  
(Continued on the next page)  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Screen displays (continued)  
26 Image stabilization display  
31 Media remaining memory display  
• Set the menu option P2CARD REMAIN in  
the DISPLAY SETUP screen to ONE-CARD  
to display the remaining time on the P2 card  
being recorded and show the number of the  
slot it resides in on the left.  
This is displayed when the OIS button is  
pressed and image stabilization is activated.  
27 Scene file name display  
Indicates the name of currently selected  
SCENE FILE (F1 to F6).  
TOTAL displays the remaining time on both  
cards.  
• In a mode check, ONE-CARD and TOTAL  
are alternately displayed.  
• This display does not appear while remaining  
memory is calculated and when the camera-  
recorder is in USB device mode.  
• A mode check during loop recording displays  
the standard recording time available to loop  
recording.  
28 Remaining battery charge  
As the remaining battery charge drops, the  
display changes as follows:  
.
When the battery is completely discharged,  
) blinks.  
(When the AC adaptor is being used, a display  
other than may appear: this is not a sign  
(
of malfunctioning.)  
• Remaining battery capacity may not be  
displayed correctly with use at high or low  
temperatures, or when the battery has  
not been used for a long period of time.  
To ensure that remaining battery capacity  
is displayed correctly, use the battery  
completely from a fully-charged state, and  
charge the battery again. (Remaining battery  
capacity may still not be displayed correctly if  
the battery has been used for long periods at  
high or low temperatures, or if the battery has  
been recharged a large number of times.)  
• The remaining battery capacity display is  
a guideline and may change according to  
usage conditions.  
• Indicates remaining time in 1-minute  
increments from 0 to 999 minutes. 999  
minutes and longer time periods are also  
indicated as 999 minutes.  
• The display blinks when 2 minutes or less  
time is left.  
32 Media information display  
Indicates the slots that contain P2 cards and  
general information on the media.  
1
1
On: P2 card ready for recording  
lights green:  
P2 card selected for recording  
flashes: The card is being recognized  
1
-
:
:
:
:
:
No card inserted  
Write-protected  
Full  
Cannot recognize  
P2 card in an invalid format (formatting  
will take care of this problem)  
P
F
X
E
29 Digital zoom display  
This displays the digital zoom ratio.  
D2x: 2x  
D5x: 5x  
D10x: 10x  
30 One-clip recording mode display  
1-CLIP:  
Indicates that recording has started for a  
new clip in one-clip recording mode.  
1
CLIP:  
Indicates that recordings can be compiled to  
a previous clip in one-clip recording mode.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
33 Recording and playback  
Center information display  
REC :  
PAUSE :  
:  
Recording  
The following information displays (Page 122) are  
provided.  
Recording standby  
Playback pause  
Play  
:  
P2 card recording and playback data  
indications  
(
) :  
Slow play (Reverse slow play)  
) :  
(
BOS  
Frame-by-frame (Reverse Frame-by-frame)  
() :  
Fast-forward/Fast-forward play (Rewind/Fast-  
backward play)  
Beginning of stream. No more data is available in  
the rearward playback direction.  
CANNOT PLAY  
Appears when playback is disabled.  
CARD ERR (1) (2) (1/2):  
The number identifies the P2 card that is giving  
trouble.  
)
×
/×  
(× /×  
:
Variable-speed search (Reverse variable-  
speed search)  
CLIP   (CLIP   ) :  
Clip forward (clip reverse), cue up of single  
clips  
UPDATING: Reading card data  
CANNOT REC  
Appears when recording cannot be started by  
pressing the START/STOP button.  
CLIP &T   (CLIP &T   )  
Cue forward (cue back) to the start point of  
clips and text memo points (when the menu  
option SEEK SELECT is set to CLIP&T in the  
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen)  
EOS  
End of stream. No more data is available in the  
forward playback direction.  
START:  
PRE REC ON (OFF) (INVALID)  
Appears when the USER button to which pre-  
recording has been assigned is pressed.  
Indicates that recording has started for a new  
clip in one-clip recording mode.  
END:  
SHOT MARK ON (OFF) (INVALID)  
Appears when pressing the USER button to  
which SHOT MARK is assigned.  
Indicates that compiling to a clip has stopped  
in one-clip recording mode.  
During DISPLAY OFF, only the REC, START,  
and END displays are shown at the top right.  
Also displayed at top right, when pre-recording,  
loop recording, interval recording or one-shot  
recording is set.  
SLOT SEL (INVALID)  
Appears when pressing the USER button to  
which SLOT SEL is assigned.  
TEXTMEMO (INVALID)  
Special recording display  
Appears when pressing the USER button to  
which TEXTMEMO is assigned.  
This display appears when the menu option  
REC FUNCTION in the RECORDING SETUP  
screen is set to INTERVAL, ONE SHOT or  
LOOP and when PRE REC is set to ON.  
L –: LOOP (loop recording)  
VFR ON NO AUDIO RECORDING  
Appears when audio signal cannot be recorded  
with VFR recording.  
I –: INTERVAL (interval recording), ONE  
SHOT (one-shot recording)  
P –: PRE REC (pre-rec recording)  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Screen displays (continued)  
Errors and warnings  
INCOMPATIBLE CARD  
This message indicates that the inserted card  
does not meet required standards and cannot be  
used.  
Errors and warnings appear when something  
goes wrong with the camera-recorder or a P2 card  
malfunctions. If the problem cannot be solved by  
turning off the camera-recorder and turning it back  
on, try replacing the card and if that does not help,  
it may be necessary to consult your supplier.  
LOW BATTERY  
This message indicates that the battery is  
depleted.  
PULL DOWN ERROR  
Video pull-down sequence error in a mode such  
as 24P  
1394  
This error occurs in a 1394 connection or when  
signal faults occur.  
1394 INITIAL ERROR: a connection error  
1394 INPUT ERROR: an input error  
1394 INPUT ERROR (OTHER FORMAT):  
(different input format)  
REC WARNING  
This is displayed during a recording error. Do the  
recording over. If this does not solve the problem,  
consult your supplier.  
CARD ERR (1) (2) (1/2)  
COPY INHIBITED:  
The number indicates the P2 card that is giving  
trouble.  
• Turn the power off if the warning continues.  
• If the warning persists after rerecording,  
replace the card with another card.  
ERROR: Other causes  
This indicates that a copy-guarded signal  
entered DV format input from the DVCPRO/DV  
connector.  
CLIP DISCONTINUED  
This message appears in one-clip recording  
mode when conformity errors occur in a complied  
clip and the next recording cannot be complied to  
the clip.  
OVER MAX# CLIPS:  
The limit for the number of clips that can be  
recorded to one P2 card (up to 1000 clips) is  
reached, and recording stops.  
REC RAM OVERFLOW:  
DIR ENTRY NG CARD  
This message indicates that the directory on  
the card has become corrupted and that normal  
recording cannot be guaranteed if operation  
continues. Make a quick backup of card data and  
reformat the card.  
Overflow of recording memory  
RUN DOWN CARD  
This message indicates that a P2 card has been  
overwritten the maximum number of times and  
that normal recording cannot be guaranteed if  
operation continues.  
It is best to replace such P2 cards with a new  
card.  
EXTERNAL1394 DISCONNECT  
This message appears when the menu option  
1394 CONTROL in the OTHER FUNCTIONS  
screen is set to EXT and recording is attempted  
without connecting an external device to the  
DVCPRO/DV connector.  
SYSTEM ERROR  
This message indicates that a system error has  
occurred. This type of error can often be  
corrected by turning off the power and turning it  
back on again.  
FAN STOPPED  
The fan has stopped.  
Turn the power off immediately, discontinue use,  
and contact your dealer.  
CAM MICON ERROR:  
The microprocessor in the camera-recorder is  
not responding.  
P2 CONTROL ERROR:  
a P2 control error has occurred.  
P2 MICON ERROR:  
FAN STOPPED HIGH TEMPERATURE  
Due to the fan stopping, the interior of the  
camera-recorder has become very hot.  
The power switches off automatically.  
Discontinue use and contact your dealer.  
The P2 microprocessor does not respond.  
CAN LENS ERROR:  
a camera-recorder lense error has occurred.  
FORMAT ERR !  
This indicates a P2 card that does not meet the  
P2 card standard.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TEMPORARY PAUSE  
IRREGULAR FRM SIG:  
Camera-recorder status display  
(in alphabetical order)  
This message indicates that the input  
GENLOCK reference signal is irregular and  
that recording has been paused.  
ABB  
ABB indicator  
ATW ACTIVE  
TURN POWER OFF  
Appears when the AWB button is pressed and  
ATW is running.  
This message indicates that an abnormal event  
has occurred, for example, that a card was  
removed during access or that a system mode  
change was made.  
ATW (ATW LOCK)  
Appears when the WHITE BAL switch is set to B  
and ATW has been assigned.  
Turn the power off and then turn it back on again.  
AWB  
AWB indicator  
AWB P3.2K/AWB P5.6K  
Displays the color temperature assigned to PRST  
when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST. Also  
displayed when AWB is performed in the PRST  
position.  
BACK LIGHT  
Displayed during iris control when back light  
status is changed by pressing the user button to  
which BACK LIGHT is assigned.  
DIAL: FRAME RATE (SHUTTER/SYNCHRO  
SCAN/LOCK)  
This is displayed when you switch shutter/frame  
rate dial using the dial select button.  
DRS ON (OFF)  
Displayed when DRS operation has been  
changed.  
D.ZOOM 10x (2x/5x/OFF/INVALID)  
This is displayed when you switch the operation  
of the digital zoom.  
FBC ON (OFF)  
Displayed when FBC operation has been  
changed.  
GAIN**dB  
Displayed when GAIN is switched.  
IRIS: MANUAL (AUTO)  
This is displayed when you switch the iris  
operation.  
OIS ON (OFF)  
This indicates that the image stabilization function  
has been switched on or off.  
SCENE******  
Displays the name of a scene file selected by  
turning the SCENE FILE dial.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Screen displays (continued)  
SHUTTER 1/**** (OFF)  
Displayed when the shutter speed is changed.  
Checking and displaying shooting  
status  
SPOT LIGHT  
• Hold down the DISP/MODE CHK button in  
recording standby or during recording to display  
the settings of each shooting function, the list of  
functions assigned to USER buttons and all other  
information. Release the button to return to the  
regular screen.  
• Press the DISP/MODE CHK button during  
recording standby or recording clears all displays.  
Press again to return to the regular display.  
• These settings are maintained when the unit is  
turned off and also when switching media and  
operating mode.  
Displayed during iris control when back light  
status is changed by pressing the USER button  
to which SPOT LIGHT is assigned.  
VFR ON (OFF)  
Displayed when VFR operation has been  
changed  
• The following items can be displayed in the  
viewfinder and on the LCD monitor by pressing  
the DISP/MODE CHK button or by configuring the  
menu option OTHER DISPLAY in the DISPLAY  
SETUP screen.  
DISP/MODE CHK button  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays opened or hidden by settings  
in the OTHER DISPLAY option  
Displays  
that MODE  
CHECK  
Displays that  
DISPLAY OFF  
clears √  
Other menus that  
clear displays  
No  
Displays  
: Not affected, √ : Opens, ×: Clears  
: Not affected  
brings up √  
ALL  
PARTIAL  
OFF  
1
2
3
Time code displays  
Warnings  
Is not cleared  
Is not cleared  
Is not cleared  
CARD&BATTERY*1  
Backup unit displays  
Recording format and  
system frequency  
indication  
4
×
×
AUTO/MANUAL  
switch indicator  
5
6
7
×
×
×
×
Information display  
Is not cleared  
System frequency  
display  
8
9
Letter box recording display  
Y GET brightness display  
Is not cleared  
Recording/playback  
frame rate display  
10  
11  
×
Audio limiter display  
×
×
12 Audio level meter display  
LEVEL METER  
Audio recording not  
13  
possible display  
14  
15  
16  
Shutter speed  
DRS display  
Iris display  
×
×
×
Auto-iris control  
displays  
17  
×
18 Zoom position display  
19 Focus control display  
ZOOM·FOCUS  
ZOOM·FOCUS  
DATE/TIME  
*2  
20  
21  
22  
Calendar  
Recommended ND  
filter display  
×
×
ND filter display  
×
23  
Gain display  
Does not  
indicate 0 dB  
×
Displays only  
ATW, LOCK,  
P3.2K and  
P5.6K  
WHITE BAL switch  
position indication  
24  
×
25  
26  
FBC indication  
×
×
Image stabilization  
display  
Scene file name  
display  
27  
28  
×
×
Remaining battery  
charge  
Goes on when  
battery charge  
drops  
CARD&BATTERY  
29 Digital zoom display  
(Continued on the next page)  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Screen displays (continued)  
Displays opened or hidden by settings  
in the OTHER DISPLAY option  
Displays  
that MODE  
CHECK  
Displays that  
DISPLAY OFF  
clears √  
Other menus that  
clear displays  
No  
Displays  
: Not affected, √ : Opens, ×: Clears  
: Not affected  
brings up √  
ALL  
PARTIAL  
OFF  
×
Appears when  
recording to a  
clip is started or  
stopped  
One-clip recording  
mode display  
30  
Media remaining  
memory display  
Goes on when  
battery charge  
drops  
31  
CARD&BATTERY  
CARD&BATTERY  
Media information  
display  
Lights when  
SLOT SEL is  
performed  
32  
×
Appears at  
Appears at top  
right only during  
recording and in  
special recording  
modes  
Recording and  
playback  
top right only  
during recording  
and in special  
recording  
33  
√ : Displayed  
× : Not displayed  
– : Displayed depending on other settings  
*1: Only the warning that a P2 card has not been inserted is not displayed.  
R
*2: When the “  
button.  
” is activated, the displays cannot be turned off by pressing the DISP/MODE CHK  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MODE CHECK indication  
MODE CHECK provides an almost complete set of camera-recorder information.  
Items 1 to 3 below are provided only by MODE CHECK.  
T C 1 2 : 3 4 : 5 6 : 2 3  
1 2 1 9 9 9 min  
P - P A U S E 1 - C L I P U S E R - 1  
S L O T 1 : NO T S U P POR T E D  
D 5 x  
F B C  
P 2  
F U L L  
A
1394  
1
S L O T 2 : A CC E S  
MA I N : Y GE T  
S I NG  
1 0 8 0 i  
AVC-I  
60  
100  
A B B NG  
AWB NG  
P 3 .2K  
3
1
2
3
4
: B A C K L I GHT  
: T E X T MEMO  
2
: DR S  
0
dB  
L T . BOX  
: S L O T S E L  
ND 1 / 1 6  
8 3% ND 1 / 4  
S E P 2 5 2 0 1 1 2 3 : 5 9 : 5 9  
6 0 : 2 4 P N  
A . RE C  
A L CH 12  
MF 2 3 . 5 f t  
Z 1 0 . 4 mm  
DR S  
1/ 2 5 0  
S PO T  
F 5 . 6  
CH 1  
CH 2  
= = = = = = = =  
1
P2 card slot status display  
Displays status for P2 card slots 1 and 2.  
ACTIVE:  
Indicates cards that are ready for read and  
write operations (includes cards selected for  
recording)  
ACCESSING:  
Indicates a card that is currently read or  
being written to  
INFO READING:  
Card in the recognition phase  
FULL:  
No more space available on the P2 card  
PROTECTED:  
The P2 card is write-protected.  
NOT SUPPORTED:  
The P2 card cannot be used or recognized.  
FORMAT ERROR:  
The P2 card is not properly formatted.  
NO CARD:  
No card has been inserted.  
No indication:  
The camera-recorder is in the USB DEVICE  
mode.  
2
3
USER button allocation information display  
This displays information for the function  
allocated to each USER button.  
• “Using the USER buttons” (Page 39)  
AWB, ABB error display  
A mode check indicates when AWB and ABB  
fail to operate normally.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menu list  
SCENE FILE screen  
Item  
Setting  
Notes  
LOAD/SAVE/INIT Loads, saves and initializes settings of the scene file  
assigned to the current scene dial position (one F1 – F6  
scene file).  
• A change in scene files affects  
only the scene file at the  
current scene dial position.  
• This setting cannot be made  
when REC SIGNAL is 1394.  
• Not available when compiling  
to a clip in one-clip recording  
mode.  
LOAD:  
Loads data stored in camera-recorder memory.  
SAVE:  
Saves current values in camera-recorder memory.  
INITIAL:  
Returns settings to their factory defaults.  
VFR  
Enables or disables variable frame rate (VFR) mode at  
1080i or 720P.  
• Not displayed when system  
mode is 480i/576i.  
• This setting cannot be made  
when REC SIGNAL is 1394.  
• Cannot be set when 1080i is  
selected with DVCPRO HD  
recording and CAMERA MODE  
is not set to 60i, 50i.  
ON:  
VFR operation  
OFF:*1  
VFR off  
FRAME RATE  
Adjusts the frame rate and exposure time at 1080i or  
720P when VFR is on.  
• Can only be set when VFR is  
ON.  
• This setting cannot be made  
when REC SIGNAL is 1394.  
• A change to 24 fps may  
cause the screen to flicker  
momentarily.  
• 1080-59.94i:  
1, 2, 4, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28,  
30 FRAME  
• 1080-50i:  
1, 2, 4, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25 FRAME  
• 720-59.94P:  
1, 2, 4, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 30,  
32, 34, 36, 40, 44, 48, 54, 60 FRAME  
• 720-50P:  
1, 2, 4, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28,  
30, 32, 34, 37, 42, 45, 48, 50 FRAME  
SYNC SCAN  
TYPE  
Selects synchro scan shutter display.  
sec:  
• Brightness may change when  
settings are switched.  
Displays the shutter speed in fractions.  
deg:  
Displays the approximate shutter opening angle.  
(SYNCHRO  
SCAN)  
Displays synchro scan shutter speeds to enable the  
operator to synchronize the camera-recorder to computer  
monitors.  
• This function only displays the shutter speeds. Use the  
SHTR/F.RATE dial to set a shutter speed.  
• Set values (displayed values) are assigned to the  
current scene file and manipulated using the LOAD,  
SAVE and INIT functions.  
• Displayed in blue when not  
set to synchro scan mode and  
when the SHTR/F.RATE dial  
settings are not available.  
“Setting SYNCHRO SCAN mode” (Page 50)  
1/60.0 (AG-HPX250P)  
1/50.0 (AG-HPX250EN)  
DETAIL LEVEL  
Adjusts the level of image outline correction (in horizontal  
and vertical directions).  
– 7 …0*1… +7  
V DETAIL LEVEL Adjusts the level of correction in vertical direction.  
– 7 …0*1… +7  
*1: The factory default when the SCENE FILE dial is set to F1.  
___indicates the factory setting.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCENE FILE screen (continued)  
Item  
Setting  
Notes  
DETAIL CORING Adjusts the level of noise reduction of the detail signal.  
– 7 …0*1… +7  
• Adjust towards – for a clearer image. Noise increases  
slightly.  
• Adjust towards + for less noise.  
CHROMA LEVEL Adjusts the chroma level.  
– 7 …0*1… +7  
CHROMA PHASE Makes fine adjustments to the chroma phase.  
– 7 …0*1… +7  
COLOR TEMP  
Ach  
Makes fine adjustments to the color temperature (after  
Ach white balance adjustment).  
– 7 …0*1… +7  
COLOR TEMP  
Bch  
Makes fine adjustments to the color temperature (after  
Bch white balance adjustment).  
– 7 …0*1… +7  
MASTER PED  
Adjusts the black master pedestal that serves as the video • Values change quickly when  
reference.  
the Operation lever is held in  
the ▲ ▼ direction.  
– 100 …+15*1… +100  
A. IRIS LEVEL  
DRS  
Sets the AUTO IRIS target value.  
– 10 …0*1… +10  
Sets whether to operate the DRS (dynamic range  
stretcher) function.  
When using 1080i, the DRS function  
is not available if shooting with 24P,  
30P, 25P, or VFR (variable frame  
rate) even if you select ON.  
ON, OFF*1  
DRS EFFECT  
Sets the compression level in high-brightness areas of the  
DRS (dynamic range stretcher) function.  
This function compresses the video signal level to extend  
the dynamic range making it possible to correctly render  
highlight areas without overexposure and loss of detail  
that would otherwise occur.  
1, 2, 3*1  
• Higher numbers mean a higher compression level of  
high-brightness areas and more noise in dark areas.  
GAMMA  
Selects the gamma curve.  
• A change in settings during  
DRS operation will not change  
video quality.  
HD NORM:*1  
Gamma setting for HD recording.  
LOW:  
Applies a gently rising gamma curve to lowbrightness  
areas for a balanced look.  
SD NORM:  
Normal video setting inherited from the DVX100 series.  
HIGH:  
Applies a steep gamma curve to low brightness areas to  
expand the tonality of dark areas for video with greater  
brightness. Contrast softens as a result.  
B.PRESS:  
Produces sharper contrast than LOW.  
CINELIKE D:  
Applies a gamma curve to produce video with a cine-like feel.  
CINELIKE V:  
Applies a gamma curve to produce high-contrast video  
with a cine-like feel.  
• A lens aperture set lower than normal video level  
(approx. 1/2) is recommended when using cine-like  
gamma to enjoy the full benefit of the function.  
*1: The factory default when the SCENE FILE dial is set to F1.  
___indicates the factory setting.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menu list (continued)  
SCENE FILE screen (continued)  
Item  
Setting  
Sets the compression level (knee point) of the high  
Notes  
KNEE  
• A change in settings during  
brightness video signals received through the MOS sensor DRS operation will not change  
to avoid overexposure.  
AUTO:*1  
video quality.  
Sets the level automatically according to the received  
signals.  
HIGH:  
High setting (compression starts at approx. 100 %)  
MID:  
Medium setting (compression starts at approx. 90 %)  
LOW:  
Low setting (compression starts at approx. 80 %)  
MATRIX  
Selects the MATRIX table to reproduce color during  
shooting.  
NORM 1:*1  
Ensures proper color rendition when shooting out in the  
open or under halogen lighting.  
NORM:  
Produces more vivid colors than NORM1.  
FLUO:  
Ensures proper color rendition when shooting indoors  
under fluorescent lighting.  
CINE-LIKE:  
Produces a tone similar to movie film.  
SKIN TONE DTL Turns the skin tone detail on or off.  
When on, reduces detail to hide any skin blemishes.  
ON*1, OFF  
V DETAIL FREQ Sets vertical detail.  
THIN: *1  
Produces fine detail.  
MID:  
Produces less detail and wider edging.  
THICK:  
Produces even less detail and the widest edging effect.  
• Progressive recording made at THIN or MID cause  
horizontal lines or oblique lines that are almost horizontal  
to flicker when viewed on a normal monitor TV (60i (50i):  
Interlace). THIN and MID settings will produce higher  
resolution video than THICK when shooting progressive  
footage that will later be edited.  
NAME EDIT  
Edits the name of scene files selected using the SCENE  
FILE dial.  
*1: The factory default when the SCENE FILE dial is set to F1.  
___indicates the factory setting.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM SETUP screen  
Item  
Setting  
Notes  
SYSTEM MODE  
Specifies the signal format used by this camera-recorder. • Not available when compiling  
to a clip in one-clip recording  
mode.  
1080-59.94i, 1080-50i, 720-59.94P, 720-50P, 480-59.94i,  
576-50i  
Factory setting: 1080-59.94i (only for AG-HPX250P)  
Factory setting: 1080-50i (only for AG-HPX250EN)  
• When a setting is changed, the message “TURN  
POWER OFF” appears. Then turn the power off and  
turn it back on again.  
REC SIGNAL  
REC FORMAT  
Selects the input signal in the DVCPRO format.  
CAMERA:  
Records the camera-recorder recording signal.  
1394:  
Records signals input to the DVCPRO/DV connector.  
• This function is always set to CAMERA when the power  
is turned on.  
• Not available when the menu  
option REC FORMAT is set  
to AVC-Intra or DVCPROHD  
during native recording.  
• Not available when compiling  
to a clip in one-clip recording  
mode.  
Selects the recording codec as well as shooting and  
recording modes.  
• Not available when 1080i or  
720P is set in SYSTEM MODE  
and REC SIGNAL is 1394.  
• Not available when compiling  
to a clip in one-clip recording  
mode.  
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-59.94i  
AVC-I100/60i, AVC-I100/30PN, AVC-I100/24PN:  
Uses the AVC-I 100 codec for recording. Shooting and  
recording at 60i, 30PN (native recording) and 24PN  
(native recording).  
AVC-I 50/60i, AVC-I 50/30PN, AVC-I 50/24PN:  
Uses the AVC-I 50 codec for recording. Shooting and  
recording at 60i, 30PN (native recording) and 24PN  
(native recording).  
DVCPROHD/60i:  
Uses the DVCPRO HD codec for recording. Use CAMERA  
MODE options to set shooting mode. Recording is locked  
to 60i.  
When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-50i  
AVC-I100/50i, AVC-I100/25PN:  
Uses the AVC-I 100 codec for recording. Shooting and  
recording at 50i, 25PN (native recording) and 24PN  
(native recording).  
AVC-I 50/50i, AVC-I 50/25PN:  
Uses the AVC-I 50 codec for recording. Shooting and  
recording at 50i, 25PN (native recording) and 24PN  
(native recording).  
DVCPROHD/50i:  
Uses the DVCPRO HD codec for recording. Use CAMERA  
MODE options to set shooting mode. Recording is locked  
to 50i.  
___indicates the factory setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
135  
Setup menu list (continued)  
SYSTEM SETUP screen (continued)  
Item  
Setting  
Notes  
REC FORMAT  
(continued)  
• Not available when 1080i or  
720P is set in SYSTEM MODE  
and REC SIGNAL is 1394.  
• Not available when compiling  
to a clip in one-clip recording  
mode.  
When SYSTEM MODE is 720-59.94P  
AVC-I100/60P, AVC-I100/30PN, AVC-I100/24PN:  
Uses the AVC-I 100 codec for recording. Shooting and  
recording at 60P, 30PN (native recording) and 24PN  
(native recording).  
AVC-I 50/60P, AVC-I 50/30PN, AVC-I 50/24PN:  
Uses the AVC-I 50 codec for recording. Shooting and  
recording at 60P, 30PN (native recording) and 24PN  
(native recording).  
DVCPROHD/60P, DVCPROHD/30PN,  
DVCPROHD/24PN:  
Uses the DVCPRO HD codec for recording. Shooting  
and recording at 60P, 30PN (native recording) and 24PN  
(native recording).  
When SYSTEM MODE is 720-50P  
AVC-I100/50P, AVC-I100/25PN:  
Uses the AVC-I 100 codec for recording. Shooting and  
recording at 50P, 25PN (native recording).  
AVC-I 50/50P, AVC-I 50/25PN:  
Uses the AVC-I 50 codec for recording. Shooting and  
recording at 50P, 25PN (native recording).  
DVCPROHD/50P, DVCPROHD/25PN:  
Uses the DVCPRO HD codec for recording. Shooting and  
recording at 50P, 25PN (native recording).  
When SYSTEM MODE is 480-59.94i  
DVCPRO50/60i, DVCPRO/60i, DV/60i:  
These use DVCPRO50, DVCPRO and DV codecs,  
respectively. Use CAMERA MODE options to set shooting  
mode. Recording is locked at 60i.  
When SYSTEM MODE is 576-50i  
DVCPRO50/50i, DVCPRO/50i, DV/50i:  
These use DVCPRO50, DVCPRO and DV codecs,  
respectively. Use CAMERA MODE options to set shooting  
mode. Recording is locked at 50i.  
CAMERA MODE Sets the shooting mode of the camera-recorder during  
• Does not appear when  
SYSTEM MODE is set to 720P.  
• Not available in the following  
conditions.  
· When the REC SIGNAL is set  
to 1394.  
· When the SYSTEM MODE  
setting is 1080i and the REC  
FORMAT setting is AVC-Intra  
codec or VFR is ON.  
DVCPRO HD codec or SD mode at 1080i.  
· When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-59.94i or 480-  
59.94i  
60i, 30P, 24P, 24PA  
· When SYSTEM MODE is set to 1080-50i, 576-50i  
50i, 25P  
· When compiling to a clip in  
one-clip recording mode.  
SCAN REVERSE Cancels the image inversion that occurs with film lenses  
and anamorphic lenses. (Page 35)  
ON, OFF  
___indicates the factory setting.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM SETUP screen (continued)  
Item  
Setting  
Notes  
ASPECT CONV  
Selects the aspect ratio for recording at 480i, 576i.  
SIDE CROP:  
Crops the right and left edges of the image.  
LETTER BOX:  
• Not available when SYSTEM  
MODE is set to 1080i or 720P.  
• Not available when compiling  
to a clip in one-clip recording  
mode.  
Adds black bands at the top and bottom of the image.  
SQUEEZE:  
Compresses the image horizontally.  
SETUP  
Sets the setup level of 480i video signals.  
0%:  
• Not displayed in 1080-50i, 720-  
50P, 576-50i.  
Setup is switched to 0 % for both output and recording  
signals.  
7.5% A:  
Setup is switched to 7.5 % for the output signal and 0 %  
for the recording signal.  
PC MODE  
SELECT  
Sets camera-recorder operating mode when an external  
device is connected via USB.  
USB HOST:  
Selects USB 2.0 for connecting an external hard disk  
drive. (Page 111)  
USB DEVICE:  
Makes it possible to connect the camera-recorder to a  
personal computer via USB 2.0 to enable use of a P2 card  
as mass storage. (Page 109)  
___indicates the factory setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
137  
Setup menu list (continued)  
SW MODE screen  
Item  
Setting  
Notes  
LOW GAIN  
Sets the gain value assigned to the L position of the GAIN  
switch.  
0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB, 15dB, 18dB  
Fixed to 0 dB when the frame  
rate is set to 4FRAME or lower  
in VFR mode.  
MID GAIN  
Sets the gain value assigned to the M position of the  
GAIN switch.  
0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB, 15dB, 18dB  
Fixed to 0 dB when the frame  
rate is set to 4FRAME or lower  
in VFR mode.  
HIGH GAIN  
SUPER GAIN  
Sets the gain value assigned to the H position of the GAIN Fixed to 0 dB when the frame  
switch.  
rate is set to 4FRAME or lower  
in VFR mode.  
0dB, 3dB, 6dB, 9dB, 12dB, 15dB, 18dB  
Configures super gain allocated to a USER button.  
24dB, 30dB  
BOTH:  
Cycles to the next value in the order 24 dB → 30 dB →  
OFF when pressed.  
Fixed to 0 dB when the frame  
rate is set to 4FRAME or lower  
in VFR mode.  
ATW  
Allows you to assign the ATW (Auto Tracking White  
Balance) function to the WHITE BAL switch. (Page 33)  
Bch:  
Controls the ATW function when the WHITE BAL switch is  
set to B position.  
OFF:  
A USER button to which ATW  
has been assigned cannot be  
used to turn ATW off when the  
WHITE BAL switch is set to B  
position and this menu is set to  
Bch.  
ATW is not available when the  
frame rate is set to 4FRAME or  
lower in VFR mode.  
Does not assign the ATW function to the WHITE BAL  
switch.  
HANDLE ZOOM Sets the zoom speed allocated to each position of the  
HANDLE ZOOM switch.  
L/OFF/H:  
Sets LOW/OFF/HIGH to positions 1/2/3 respectively.  
(Zoom does not operate when the setting is OFF.)  
L/M/H:  
Sets LOW/MID/HIGH to positions 1/2/3 respectively.  
L/OFF/M:  
Sets LOW/OFF/MID to positions 1/2/3 respectively. (Zoom  
does not operate when the setting is OFF.)  
W.BAL.PRESET Sets the color temperature assigned to the PRST position  
of the WHITE BAL switch.  
3.2K, 5.6K  
___indicates the factory setting.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SW MODE screen (continued)  
Item  
Setting  
Notes  
USER MAIN  
Sets the function assigned to the USER MAIN button.  
SPOTLIGHT, BACKLIGHT, ATW, ATWLOCK, S.GAIN,  
D.ZOOM, Y GET, DRS, TEXT MEMO, SLOT SEL,  
SHOT MARK, MAG A. LVL, LVL METER, PRE REC,  
WFM, LAST CLIP, FBC, LCD B.L  
“Using the USER buttons” (Page 39)  
USER1  
Sets a function assigned to the USER1 button.  
The functions that can be assigned to this button are the  
same as for the USER MAIN button.  
BACKLIGHT (factory default setting)  
“Using the USER buttons” (Page 39)  
USER2  
Sets a function assigned to the USER2 button.  
The functions that can be assigned to this button are the  
same as for the USER MAIN button.  
TEXT MEMO (factory default setting)  
“Using the USER buttons” (Page 39)  
USER3  
Sets a function assigned to the USER3 button.  
The functions that can be assigned to this button are the  
same as for the USER MAIN button.  
DRS (factory default setting)  
“Using the USER buttons” (Page 39)  
USER4  
Sets a function assigned to the USER4 button.  
The functions that can be assigned to this button are the  
same as for the USER MAIN button.  
SLOT SEL  
“Using the USER buttons” (Page 39)  
MF ASSIST  
Automatically sets the last focus during manual focusing.  
ON:  
Automatically sets the last focus.  
• The focus may not be set correctly if the last focus  
differs considerably from the manually set focus.  
You cannot operate using the remote control connected  
to the CAM REMOTE jack.  
OFF:  
The focus is not adjusted automatically.  
WFM  
Selects the waveform displayed in the LCD monitor when  
the user button to which WFM has been assigned is  
pressed.  
WAVE:  
Displays a waveform.  
VECTOR:  
Vectorscope display  
WAVE/VECT:  
Each press of the button, switches the settings in the  
following order:  
OFF → WAVE (waveform) → VECTOR → OFF  
___indicates the factory setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
139  
Setup menu list (continued)  
AUTO SW screen  
Item  
Setting  
Notes  
A.IRIS  
AGC  
ON:  
Auto operation switches OFF  
when the frame rate is set  
to 4FRAME or lower in VFR  
mode.  
Performs the auto iris control in auto mode. The IRIS  
button is deactivated.  
OFF:  
Deactivates the auto iris control in auto mode. This  
performs the iris control selected with the IRIS button.  
Sets the Auto Gain Control when the ON is selected in  
A.IRIS.  
• Cannot be set when A.IRIS is  
OFF.  
Auto operation switches OFF  
when the frame rate is set  
to 4FRAME or lower in VFR  
mode.  
AGC does not operate when a  
USER button to which S.GAIN  
has been allocated is pressed  
and super gain is set to 24 dB  
or 30 dB.  
6dB:  
Performs the Auto Gain Control (max. 6 dB) in auto  
mode.  
12dB:  
Performs the Auto Gain Control (max. 12 dB) in auto  
mode.  
18dB:  
Performs the Auto Gain Control (max. 18 dB) in auto  
mode.  
OFF:  
Does not perform the Auto Gain Control in auto mode.  
Initiates the control of the gain selected by the GAIN  
switch.  
ATW  
ON:  
Auto operation switches OFF  
when the frame rate is set  
to 4FRAME or lower in VFR  
mode.  
Performs the ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) function  
in auto mode. You cannot select ON/OFF of the ATW  
function with the WHITE BAL switch or the USER button  
when this is selected. However, if ATWLOCK is assigned  
to the USER button, you can set the white balance value  
with the USER button.  
OFF:  
Does not perform the white balance function in auto  
mode. This performs the white balance function selected  
with the WHITE BAL switch.  
AF  
ON:  
Auto operation switches OFF  
when the frame rate is set  
to 4FRAME or lower in VFR  
mode.  
Performs auto focusing in auto mode. You cannot use  
the FOCUS switch and PUSH AUTO button when this is  
selected.  
OFF:  
Does not perform auto focusing in auto mode. This  
performs the focusing selected with the FOCUS switch or  
PUSH AUTO button.  
___indicates the factory setting.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RECORDING SETUP screen  
Item  
Setting  
Notes  
REC FUNCTION Sets special recording modes.  
• Not available in the following  
conditions.  
· When REC SIGNAL is set to  
1394  
· When REC FORMAT is set to  
native recording.  
· When SYSTEM MODE is set  
to 1080- 59.94i or 480-59.94i;  
and CAMERA MODE is set to  
24P or 24PA.  
NORMAL:  
The special recording modes are not used.  
INTERVAL:  
Sets interval recording.  
ONE SHOT:  
Sets one-shot recording.  
LOOP:  
Sets loop recording.  
“Using special recording modes” (Page 43)  
· When compiling to a clip in  
one-clip recording mode.  
· When VFR is set to ON.  
This function is always set to NORMAL when the power  
is turned on.  
ONE SHOT TIME Sets the duration for one-shot recording.  
1frm, 2frm, 4frm, 8frm, 16frm, 1s  
• Can only be set when REC  
FUNCTION is ONE SHOT.  
“One-shot recording (ONE SHOT REC)” (Page 45)  
INTERVAL TIME Sets the time interval of interval recording.  
2frm, 4frm, 8frm, 16frm, 1s, 2s, 5s, 10s, 30s, 1min,  
5min, 10min  
• Can only be set when REC  
FUNCTION is INTERVAL.  
“Interval recording (INTERVAL REC)” (Page 44)  
START DELAY  
This delays the start of interval and one-shot recording by • Can only be set when REC  
about 1 second.  
ON, OFF  
FUNCTION is INTERVAL or  
ONE SHOT.  
PREREC MODE Sets PRE REC.  
• Not available in the following  
conditions.  
ON, OFF  
“Pre-recording (PRE REC)” (Page 44)  
· When REC SIGNAL is set to  
1394.  
· When VFR is set to ON.  
· When REC FORMAT is set to  
native recording.  
· When SYSTEM MODE is set  
to 1080-59.94i or 480-59.94i;  
and CAMERA MODE is set to  
24P or 24PA.  
· When REC FUNCTION is  
set to something other than  
NORMAL.  
TC MODE  
Sets count correction when using the internal time code  
generator.  
Not displayed in 1080-50i, 720-  
50P, 576-50i.  
• Not available when operates  
24P, 24PA or 24PN mode.  
Counts NDF time code in 24P,  
24PA or 24PN mode.  
DF:  
Drop frame time code  
NDF:  
Non drop frame time code  
“Setting the time code” (Page 66)  
TCG  
Sets the mode in which you advance the time code.  
FREE RUN:  
The time code is advanced regardless of the operation  
mode.  
• In native recording in VFR mode, if the number of  
frames differs for shooting and recording, the time code  
changes to REC RUN.  
REC RUN:  
The time code is advanced only when recording.  
___indicates the factory setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
141  
Setup menu list (continued)  
RECORDING SETUP screen (continued)  
Item  
Setting  
Notes  
TC PRESET  
Sets the initial time code.  
• Set the frame value to 0 or multiples of 5 when shooting/  
recording is set to 24P, 24PA, or 24PN.  
If any other value, the recorded time code will mis-  
match.  
UB MODE  
Sets the data recorded in the camera-recorder user bits.  
USER, TIME, DATE, EXT, TCG, FRM. RATE  
“Setting user bits” (Page 62)  
UB PRESET  
Sets the user information. Select USER in UB MODE.  
ONE CLIP REC  
Sets one-clip recording mode.  
ON, OFF  
• Not available in the following  
conditions.  
“One-clip recording (ONE CLIP REC)” (Page 47)  
· When REC FUNCTION is  
set to something other than  
NORMAL.  
· When REC SIGNAL is set to  
1394.  
· When VFR is set to ON.  
START TEXT  
MEMO  
Sets whether to automatically add a text memo at the  
recording start position each time you start recording.  
ON, OFF  
• Not available when REC  
FUNCTION is set to something  
other than NORMAL.  
• The text memo that is added  
when this is set to ON indicates  
the recording start position.  
For details on recording the text  
memo as text information, refer  
to “Setting of clip meta data”  
(Page 87).  
TIME STAMP  
Determines whether or not date and time information will  
be superimposed on the image.  
ON:  
Superimposes date and time information on the image.  
OFF:  
Does not superimpose date and time information on the  
image.  
<Note>  
When DATE/TIME on the DISPLAY SETUP screen  
is set to OFF, the date and time information is not  
superimposed.  
___indicates the factory setting.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUDIO SETUP screen  
Item  
Setting  
Notes  
LIMITER CH1  
LIMITER CH2  
LIMITER CH3  
LIMITER CH4  
Sets the CH1 limiter.  
ON, OFF  
• When the AUDIO AUTO/MANU  
CH1 switch is set to AUTO  
and auto adjustment mode is  
active, the limiter is disabled  
regardless of these settings.  
Sets the CH2 limiter.  
ON, OFF  
• When the AUDIO AUTO/MANU  
CH2 switch is set to AUTO  
and auto adjustment mode is  
active, the limiter is disabled  
regardless of these settings.  
Sets the CH3 limiter.  
ON, OFF  
• When the AUDIO AUTO/MANU  
CH3 switch is set to AUTO  
and auto adjustment mode is  
active, the limiter is disabled  
regardless of these settings.  
Sets the CH4 limiter.  
ON, OFF  
• When the AUDIO AUTO/MANU  
CH4 switch is set to AUTO  
and auto adjustment mode is  
active, the limiter is disabled  
regardless of these settings.  
AUTO LEVEL  
CH3  
Selects the method for setting CH3 level.  
ON:  
Engages the auto adjustment mode. (The limiter is not  
available.)  
OFF:  
Locks the level.  
AUTO LEVEL  
CH4  
Selects the method for setting CH4 level.  
Same setting as AUTO LEVEL CH3.  
ON, OFF  
25M REC CH SEL Selects the audio channels to be recorded in the DVCPRO • Not available in the following  
and DV formats.  
conditions.  
· When SYSTEM MODE is  
1080-59.94i (50i) or 720-  
59.94P (50P).  
· When SYSTEM MODE is set  
to 480-59.94i or 576-50i and  
REC FORMAT is set to the  
DVCPRO50 codec.  
2CH:  
Only recorded on CH1 and CH2.  
4CH:  
Records on all four channels.  
· REC SIGNAL is set to 1394  
(operation depends on 1394  
input status).  
· When compiling to a clip in  
one-clip recording mode.  
TEST TONE  
Selects the test signal.  
LEVEL1:  
A 1 kHz test tone is output during color bar output.  
LEVEL2:  
Outputs the above test tone at a volume lower than  
LEVEL1.  
OFF:  
Does not output a test tone.  
___indicates the factory setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
143  
Setup menu list (continued)  
AUDIO SETUP screen (continued)  
Item  
INT MIC  
Setting  
Notes  
Determines whether or not input from the internal  
microphone is used during recording.  
ON:  
Uses internal microphone input.  
OFF:  
Does not use internal microphone input.  
MIC GAIN1  
MIC GAIN2  
Sets the level of an external microphone connected to the  
AUDIO INPUT1 terminal.  
– 40dB, 50dB, 60dB  
Sets the level of an external microphone connected to the  
AUDIO INPUT2 terminal.  
– 40dB, 50dB, 60dB  
1394 AUDIO OUT Selects audio channel output to 1394 OUT in DVCPRO or • Available only when SYSTEM  
DV mode.  
CH1/CH2, CH3/CH4  
MODE is set to 480-59.94i or  
576-50i and REC FORMAT is  
set to DVCPRO or DV.  
AUDIO OUT  
Sets the audio signal output from the AUDIO OUT terminal  
(pin jack), HDMI OUT terminal, headphone terminal, and  
built-in speaker during P2 card playback.  
CH1/CH2:  
CH1 output = CH1 signals, CH2 output = CH2 signals  
CH1:  
CH1 output = CH1 signals, CH2 output = CH1 signals  
CH2:  
CH1 output = CH2 signals, CH2 output = CH2 signals  
CH3/CH4:  
CH1 output = CH3 signals, CH2 output = CH4 signals  
CH3:  
CH1 output = CH3 signals, CH2 output = CH3 signals  
CH4:  
CH1 output = CH4 signals, CH2 output = CH4 signals  
___indicates the factory setting.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OUTPUT SEL screen  
Item  
Setting  
Notes  
SDI & HDMI  
SELECT  
Sets the type for the signal format output from the SDI  
OUT and HDMI OUT terminals.  
1080i/720P:  
Not available when SYSTEM  
MODE is set to 480-59.94i,  
576-50i.  
Follows 1080i, 720P settings of SYSTEM MODE.  
1080i*1:  
Outputs at 1080i even when SYSTEM MODE is set to  
720P.  
DOWNCON:  
Down converts to SD signal and outputs.  
SDI & HDMI  
CHAR  
Selects whether or not to superimpose characters  
on images output from the SDI OUT and HDMI OUT  
terminals.  
ON, OFF  
SDI OUT  
Selects video output from SDI OUT or HDMI OUT  
terminal.  
ON:  
Video is output from the SDI OUT connector.  
OFF:  
Video is not output from the SDI OUT connector.  
SDI METADATA  
SDI EDH  
Sets metadata (UMID) superimposition onto SDI OUT.  
ON:  
Superimposes metadata.  
OFF:  
Does not superimpose metadata.  
Sets EDH superimposition when SDI OUT is an SD signal  
(480i, 576i).  
ON:  
Superimposes EDH.  
OFF:  
Does not superimpose EDH.  
DOWNCON  
MODE  
Sets downconverter output (VIDEO OUT and DOWNCON  
SDI OUT) in HD mode (1080i, 720P).  
SIDE CROP, LETTER BOX, SQUEEZE  
Not available when SYSTEM  
MODE is set to 480-59.94i,  
576-50i.  
VIDEO OUT  
CHAR  
Specifies whether or not characters are superimposed on  
VIDEO OUT signals.  
ON:  
Superimposes characters.  
OFF:  
Does not superimpose characters.  
VIDEO OUT  
ZEBRA  
Specifies whether or not zebra pattern is superimposed  
on VIDEO OUT signals.  
ON:  
Displays a zebra pattern also on images output via the  
VIDEO OUT connector.  
OFF:  
The zebra pattern is not displayed in video output from the  
VIDEO OUT connector.  
TC IN/OUT SEL  
Selects whether to use the TC IN/OUT terminal for input  
(TC IN) or output (TC OUT).  
TC OUT, TC IN  
*1: Use this to check video when SYSTEM MODE is set to 720-59.94P (50P) and 1080i is selected.  
___indicates the factory setting.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menu list (continued)  
OUTPUT SEL screen (continued)  
Item  
TC OUT  
Setting  
Notes  
Sets the time code type output when TC IN/OUT  
connector is connected as TC OUT.  
Not available when TC IN/OUT  
SEL is set to TC IN.  
TCG:  
Outputs the time code generator value of the camera-  
recorder at all times.  
TCG/TCR:  
Outputs time code generator value during camera-  
recorder recording and outputs the played back time code  
during video playback.  
TC VIDEO SYNC Sets the delay of time code output when TC IN/OUT  
Not available when TC IN/OUT  
SEL is set to TC IN.  
connector is connected as TC OUT.  
RECORDING:  
Outputs the unit’s time code with no delay.  
This is used when performing simultaneous recording on  
2 units with this unit’s time code as the master.  
VIDEO OUT:  
Outputs the time code in line with delay of video output  
from the VIDEO OUT connector.  
___indicates the factory setting.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DISPLAY SETUP screen  
Item  
Setting  
Notes  
EVF PEAK  
LEVEL  
Adjusts the peaking level of the viewfinder and the LCD  
monitor.  
– 7…0…+ 7  
EVF PEAK FREQ Adjusts the peaking frequency of the viewfinder and the  
LCD monitor.  
HIGH, LOW  
EVF SETTING  
Adjusts viewfinder brightness and contrast on a  
subscreen.  
(Subscreen)  
EVF BRIGHTNESS  
EVF CONTRAST  
EVF B. LIGHT  
EVF COLOR  
Adjusts viewfinder backlight brightness.  
HIGH, NORMAL, LOW  
Selects whether the viewfinder image will be displayed in  
color or monochrome.  
ON:  
Color display  
OFF:  
Monochrome display  
EVF MODE  
Sets viewfinder off automacally or not when the LCD  
monitor is opened.  
AUTO:  
Switches off automatically.  
ON:  
The viewfinder operates constantly.  
However, this is limited to when no video is output from  
the SDI OUT terminal.  
“SDI OUT” (Page 145)  
ZEBRA1 DETECT Sets the level of the right-leaning zebra pattern 1.  
50%…70%…109%  
ZEBRA2 DETECT Sets the level of the left-leaning zebra pattern 2.  
50%…85%…109%  
ZEBRA2  
MARKER  
Selects ZEBRA2 type. (Page 66)  
ON, SPOT, OFF  
Turns center marker displayed in the viewfinder and  
on the LCD monitor on and off. (Page 36)  
ON, OFF  
___indicates the factory setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
147  
Setup menu list (continued)  
DISPLAY SETUP screen (continued)  
Item  
Setting  
Notes  
SAFETY ZONE  
Sets the safety zone displayed in the viewfinder and on  
the LCD monitor.  
When SYSTEM MODE is set  
to 480-59.94i, 576-50i and  
ASPECT CONV is set to SIDE  
CROP or LETTER BOX, the  
safety zone marker is not  
displayed even if you select  
4:3, 13:9, or 14:9.  
• HD (1080i, 720P)  
90% : 90 % display at 16:9  
4 : 3 : 100 % display at 4:3  
14 : 9 : 100 % display at 14:9 (between 16:9 and 4:3 size)  
1.85 : 1 : 100 % display at 1.85:1 (American VistaVision range)  
2 : 1 : 100 % display at 2:1  
(Scope Size range)  
2.35 : 1 : 100 % display at 2.35:1 (CinemaScope range)  
2.39 : 1 : 100 % display at 2.39:1  
OFF : Safety zone marker not displayed.  
• SD (480i, 576i)  
90% : 90 % display at 16:9  
4 : 3 : 100 % display at 4:3  
13 : 9 : 100 % display at 13:9  
14 : 9 : 100 % display at 14:9  
OFF : Safety zone marker not displayed.  
FOCUS BAR  
The length of the focus bar indicates accuracy of focusing. • This function is not interlocked  
with the FOCUS ASSIST  
button.  
ON:  
Displays the focus bar.  
OFF:  
Does not display the focus bar.  
LCD SETTING  
Makes it possible to set video color level, brightness and  
contrast displayed in the LCD monitor in a subscreen.  
(Subscreen)  
LCD COLOR LEVEL  
LCD BRIGHTNESS  
LCD CONTRAST  
SELF SHOOT  
Sets the LCD monitor display when taking self portraits.  
NORMAL:  
The LCD image is not inverted sideways.  
MIRROR:  
The LCD image is inverted sideways.  
• LCD monitor status displays do not appear when this  
function is set to MIRROR to shoot self portraits.  
LCD BACKLIGHT Adjusts LCD monitor backlight brightness.  
+1, 0, -1, -2, -3  
+1:  
The backlight becomes brighter.  
-3:  
The darkest setting.  
DATE/TIME  
Sets the date and time display.  
TIME:  
Hours, minutes and second display  
DATE:  
Year, month and day display  
TIME&DATE:  
Hours, minutes, seconds and year, month and day display  
OFF:  
Not displayed  
LEVEL METER  
Sets the Audio Level Meter display.  
ON, OFF  
___indicates the factory setting.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DISPLAY SETUP screen (continued)  
Item  
Setting  
Notes  
ZOOM·FOCUS  
Selects the unit of zoom and focus values.  
OFF, NUMBER, mm/feet, mm/m  
<Note>  
Use the mm/feet or mm/m display only as a general  
guideline since it is not entirely accurate.  
CARD&  
Sets the remaining P2 card capacity and battery charge.  
BATTERY  
ON, OFF  
P2CARD REMAIN Determines how remaining P2 card capacity is displayed.  
ONE-CARD:  
Indicates the remaining capacity of the card that is being  
recorded.  
TOTAL:  
Displays value for both cards.  
OTHER DISPLAY Sets display of other data.  
PARTIAL:  
Displays some of the data.  
ALL:  
Displays all data.  
OFF:  
Not displayed.  
MENU BACK  
Select whether to lower the transparency of the  
background to make menu text easier to read.  
ON:  
Lowers background transparency. (However, the  
transparency of LCD SETTING and EVF SETTING is not  
lowered.)  
OFF:  
Does not lower background transparency.  
REC COUNTER  
Selects counter operation during recording.  
TOTAL:  
Provides a continuous count until reset by pressing the  
COUNTER RESET button.  
CLIP:  
Clears the count value at start of recording and counts  
time of recording.  
___indicates the factory setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
149  
Setup menu list (continued)  
CARD FUNCTIONS screen  
Item  
Setting  
Notes  
SCENE FILE  
Reads/writes scene files from/onto the SD memory card. • This setting cannot be made  
when REC SIGNAL is 1394.  
• Not available when compiling  
to a clip in one-clip recording  
mode.  
FILE SELECT:  
Selects scene files (1 – 4).  
READ:  
Reads the selected scene file (1 – 4) settings stored on  
the SD memory card.  
WRITE:  
Saves the current scene file (1 – 4) settings to the SD  
memory card.  
TITLE RELOAD:  
Reloads title list.  
USER FILE  
Reads/writes user files (files other than SCENE FILES)  
from/onto the SD memory card.  
FILE SELECT:  
Selects user files (1 – 4).  
READ:  
• This setting cannot be made  
when REC SIGNAL is 1394.  
• Not available when compiling  
to a clip in one-clip recording  
mode.  
Reads the user file (1 – 4) settings stored on the SD  
memory card.  
WRITE:  
Saves the current user file (1 – 4) settings to the SD  
memory card.  
TITLE RELOAD:  
Reloads title list.  
SD CARD  
FORMAT  
Formats SD memory cards.  
• Not available when compiling  
to a clip in one-clip recording  
mode.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen  
Item  
Setting  
Notes  
USER FILE  
Saves user files to camera-recorder memory, loads them • This setting cannot be made  
into camera-recorder memory or initializes them. (Page 60) when REC SIGNAL is 1394.  
LOAD, SAVE, INITIAL  
• This does not affect options in the SCENE FILE screen.  
• Not available when compiling  
to a clip in one-clip recording  
mode.  
REMOTE  
Sets the operations of the supplied remote control unit.  
“Remote control setup” (Page 24 of Vol. 1)  
OFF:  
Operations are not accepted from any remote control.  
1:  
Accepts commands from the remote control set for  
“operation mode 1”.  
2:  
Accepts commands from the remote control set for  
“operation mode 2”.  
1394 CONTROL Selects the method the camera-recorder uses for  
controlling external devices connected to the DVCPRO/  
DV connector. (Page 106)  
Not available in AVC-Intra  
mode and DVCPRO HD native  
mode.  
Not available during interval,  
one-shot and loop recording.  
EXT:  
Controls only the external device, but does not transfer  
data to the camera-recorder for recording.  
BOTH:  
BOTH: Controls both the external device and the camera-  
recorder, and also records.  
CHAIN:  
When there is no more space left for recording in the  
camera-recorder, recording is automatically made to the  
external device.  
OFF:  
No control  
1394 CMD SEL  
Determines how recording is stopped when the camera-  
recorder controls an external device connected to the  
DVCPRO/DV connector.  
REC_P:  
Engages REC/PAUSE status.  
Not available in AVC-Intra  
mode and DVCPRO HD native  
mode.  
Not available during interval,  
one-shot and loop recording.  
STOP:  
Stops recording.  
ACCESS LED  
TALLY LAMP  
Determines whether or not the P2 CARD ACCESS LED  
should light.  
ON, OFF  
Sets lighting of the tally lamp.  
OFF:  
The tally lamp does not light.  
FRONT:  
Front tally lamp (microphone side) lights.  
REAR:  
Rear tally lamp (viewfinder side) lights.  
BOTH:  
Both tally lamps light.  
CLOCK SETTING Sets the internal calendar (date).  
“Setting the calendar” (Page 26 of Vol. 1)  
___indicates the factory setting.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menu list (continued)  
OTHER FUNCTIONS screen (continued)  
Item  
Setting  
Notes  
TIME ZONE  
Adds to or deducts from GMT the time value of -12:00 to • This setting cannot be initialized  
+13:00 in 30-minute steps. (As an exception, you can set  
+12:45.) Refer to the table below.  
0:00  
by performing the MENU INIT  
option and the INITIAL option in  
USER FILE.  
After setting the time, change  
the setting menu TIME ZONE  
item and the display and the  
recorded local time will be  
reset accordingly.  
Time  
Time  
Area  
Greenwich  
Area  
difference  
difference  
Central Europe  
00:00  
01:00  
01:30  
02:00  
02:30  
03:00  
03:30  
04:00  
04:30  
05:00  
00:30  
01:00  
01:30  
02:00  
02:30  
03:00  
03:30  
04:00  
04:30  
05:00  
05:30  
06:00  
06:30  
07:00  
07:30  
08:00  
08:30  
09:00  
09:30  
10:00  
10:30  
11:00  
11:30  
12:00  
00:30  
Azores Islands  
Mid-Atlantic  
Eastern Europe  
Moscow  
Tehran  
Buenos Aires  
Newfoundland Island  
Halifax  
Abu Dhabi  
Kabul  
Islamabad  
Bombay  
Dacca  
05:30  
06:00  
New York  
Chicago  
Yangon  
Bangkok  
06:30  
07:00  
07:30  
08:00  
08:30  
09:00  
09:30  
10:00  
10:30  
11:00  
11:30  
12:00  
12:45  
13:00  
Denver  
Beijing  
Los Angeles  
Tokyo  
Darwin  
Alaska  
Guam  
Marquesas Islands  
Hawaii  
Lord Howe Island  
Solomon Islands  
Norfolk Island  
New Zealand  
Chatham Islands  
Midway Island  
Kwajalein  
GL PHASE  
Selects the output signal whose phase is locked to the  
signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector in HD (1080i,  
720P) mode. (Page 70)  
• Not available when SYSTEM  
MODE is set to 480-59.94i or  
576-50i.  
HD SDI:  
The HD SDI is locked to the genlock input.  
COMPOSITE:  
The down-converted composite signal (VIDEO OUT or  
SDI OUT 480i, 576i signal) is locked to the genlock input.  
H PHASE  
Adjusts the horizontal phase when phase is locked to the • Values change quickly when  
signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector.  
– 512…0…+ 511  
the Operation lever is held in  
the ▲ ▼ direction.  
SEEK SELECT  
Selects the position that is cued up when the Operation  
lever in the   direction is pressed while playback is  
paused.  
CLIP:  
Start point of clips  
CLIP&T:  
Start point of clips and text memo add points  
MENU INIT  
Restores all setting menu values including all scene files  
(F1 to F6) and the user file to their factory defaults.  
Not available in the following  
conditions.  
· When REC SIGNAL is set to  
1394.  
· When compiling to a clip in  
one-clip recording mode.  
___indicates the factory setting.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAGNOSTIC screen  
Item  
Setting  
Notes  
VERSION  
Indicates the version of the firmware used in this camera-  
recorder.  
A subscreen provides details on which firmware versions  
are used.  
(Subscreen)  
CAM SOFT:  
Camera microprocessor software  
SYSCON SOFT:  
Software for system control microprocessor  
P2CS BL2-1:  
Boot program 1 for P2 control microprocessor  
P2CS BL2-2:  
Boot program 2 for P2 control microprocessor  
P2CS KR:  
P2 control microprocessor kernel  
P2CS AP:  
P2 control microprocessor application  
VUP:  
System software used for updating all camera firmware  
VUP FS:  
File system for updating the camera  
CAM FPGA:  
Camera FPGA configuration ROM  
DM FPGA:  
Main FPGA configuration ROM  
MODEL NAME  
SERIAL NO.  
OPERATION  
Indicates the model name of this camera-recorder.  
Indicates serial number of this camera-recorder.  
Indicates the time of the camera-recorder has been on.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menu list (continued)  
OPTION MENU screen  
Open this menu by holding down the DISP/MODE CHK button and when shooting status appears press  
the front MENU button.  
• Use this function to check connection status during nonlinear editing.  
• Use this function to switch between image production effects.  
Item  
Setting  
Notes  
1394 STATUS  
Opens the subscreen that shows 1394 status.  
(Subscreen)  
FORMAT:  
Format of input or output signals  
RATE:  
Transfer rate of input or output signals  
60/50:  
Signal system of input or output signals  
CH:  
Channel of input or output signals  
SPEED:  
Transfer rate of input or output signals  
STATUS:  
Status of signals output or input via the IEEE1394 digital  
interface  
VIDEO:  
Status of input or output video signals  
AUDIO:  
Status of input or output audio signals  
1394 CONFIG  
Opens a menu for configuring 1394 functionality.  
DFLT, 1 – 255  
• Use DFLT for normal operation.  
P.A.P FILTER *1  
The type of video filter for improving image quality with 3D • This item cannot be written to  
processing technology can be selected.  
TYPE1:  
This setting is suitable for image production that reduces  
noise as far as possible with increased sensitivity by using  
a 3D adaptation effect.  
or read from an SD memory  
card as a SCENE FILE or  
USER FILE.  
TYPE2:  
This setting suppresses 3D adaptation effects and is  
suitable for an image production with natural sensitivity  
and image quality.  
• When a setting is changed, the message “TURN  
POWER OFF” appears. Then turn the power off and  
turn it back on again.  
*1:An image processing circuit for high image quality and high sensitivity using PAP (Progressive  
Advanced Processing) technology which takes advantage of 3D processing  
___indicates the factory setting.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before calling for service  
Power supply  
There’s no power.  
• Make sure the battery and AC adaptor are connected  
properly. Check the connections again.  
Power goes off as soon • The battery may have run out.  
(Page 21 of Vol. 1)  
(Page 20 of Vol. 1)  
as it is turned on.  
• If the remaining battery charge display is blinking or  
appears, the battery has run out.  
• Either recharge the battery or replace the discharged battery  
with a fully charged one.  
Battery  
The battery runs down • Make sure the battery is fully charged.  
(Page 20 of Vol. 1)  
quickly.  
Keep charging until the AC adaptor’s CHARGE lamp goes  
out.  
• Are you using the battery in a cold place?  
The battery is affected by the ambient temperature. Its  
operating time is reduced in low-temperatures.  
• The battery may have reached the end of its service life.  
The battery will become unchargeable. The battery has  
a certain service life which varies depending on how the  
battery is used. If the battery operates only for a short period  
even when it is charged adequately, it has reached the end  
of its service life.  
The remaining battery  
• The remaining battery capacity display is merely a guideline.  
capacity is not displayed To ensure that remaining battery capacity is displayed  
correctly.  
correctly, use the battery completely from a fully-charged  
state, and charge the battery again. (Remaining battery  
capacity may still not be displayed correctly if the battery has  
been used for long periods in high or low temperatures, or if  
the battery has been recharged a large number of times.)  
Shooting  
Cannot start shooting.  
Cannot focus  
automatically.  
• Make sure the POWER/MODE switch is ON.  
You can focus automatically when the auto focus mode is  
selected.  
(Page 25 of Vol. 1)  
(Page 28)  
You may be shooting a scene where it is difficult to bring the  
subject into focus in the auto focus mode.  
If this is the case, focus in the manual focus mode.  
It may be hard to bring the subject into focus when  
both close and distant objects are to be shot  
shooting through a dirty window  
shooting in a dark place  
there are sparkling or shiny objects around the subject  
the subject is moving fast  
shooting a scene with minimal contrast  
·
·
·
·
·
·
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before calling for service (continued)  
Shooting  
Cannot shoot even  
though the P2 card is  
inserted correctly.  
• Make sure the P2 card’s write-protect switch is not in the  
PROTECT position.  
(Page 12)  
Recording is not possible if it is in this position.  
• There may be little free memory left on the P2 card.  
If so, save the data onto another media, and delete the data  
you no longer need; alternatively, replace the card with a  
new one.  
• The P2 card may be formatted incorrectly. Alternatively, the (Page 13)  
card you are using may not be formatted for use with the  
unit. If so, format the card in the unit.  
• 2 GB P2 cards cannot be used.  
E
(Page 124)  
• The media information display may be indicating “  
If so, format the card in the unit.  
”.  
• Recording is not possible if the number of clips on a single  
P2 card exceeds 1000.  
As clips made of many linked clips are generated with one-  
clip recording, there may be 1000 clips even when the  
number of clips you can see on the thumbnail screen is less  
than 1000.  
Cannot perform interval • Insert 2 cards which recording space are left over 1 munites (Page 46)  
recording, one-shot  
recording or loop  
recording.  
when performing loop recording.  
• In modes such as 24P you cannot perform these types of  
recording.  
See page 43 “Using special recording modes” and set the  
recording format etc.  
Editing  
Cannot perform  
nonlinear editing.  
• Check the specifications of your personal computer and  
connecting cable.  
(Page 102)  
• Check the menu settings and operation mode.  
For a 1394 connection, use PB/THUMBNAIL mode or set  
REC SIGNAL in the setting menu to 1394.  
(Page 109)  
(Page 135)  
Also, for a USB connection, set PC MODE SELECT to USB (Page 137)  
DEVICE and select PC mode using the POWER/MODE  
switch.  
Cannot dub onto an  
external device.  
• Make sure the external device is connected correctly.  
• Are you using a mode that can output from the DVCPRO/DV  
terminal?  
(Page 103)  
You cannot output with native recording mode for AVC-Intra,  
24PN etc.  
Displays  
Something is wrong with • The time code display may not register a regular count if a  
the time code display. tape is played in the reverse slow mode. This is normal.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
Cannot play even when • Is the PB/THUMBNAIL lamp on? If the CAMERA lamp  
(Page 74)  
(Page 78)  
I press the play button.  
is on, press the POWER/MODE switch so that the PB/  
THUMBNAIL lamp turns on.  
• Have you selected a clip that cannot be played back (clip  
number is red)?  
· Clips with a different SYSTEM MODE (1080i, 720P etc.)  
cannot be played back.  
· 24-bit audio clips (BITS PER SAMPLE is 24 in AUDIO of  
CLIP PROPERTY) recorded with devices such as an AJ-  
HPX3100 cannot be played back.  
Images do not appear  
on the television even  
• Make sure the input selector on your television is set to  
video input.  
though I have connected Read the television’s instructions carefully and select the  
the camera-recorder  
properly.  
correct video input connector for the camera-recorder.  
Cannot hear any sound You may have turned down the camera-recorder’s volume  
(Page 100)  
from the camera-  
control too far.  
recorder’s speaker.  
Adjust the volume level using the PAGE/AUDIO MON/VAR  
button+.  
Cannot perform hot  
swap playback.  
• This unit does not support hot swap playback.  
To replace one card with another during dubbing, stop the  
dubbing first, and upon completing the replacement, resume  
it.  
Cannot perform clip  
recording.  
• Cannot copy when clips are continuously linked in ONE  
CLIP REC mode.  
(Page 86)  
Select CAMERA mode and push the Operation lever in the  
▼ direction (STOP) for 2 seconds to release the clip linking.  
Other  
Cannot read the data on • Make sure the SD memory card is formatted correctly.  
the SD memory card. If it is not, format the card in the unit.  
The remote control does • The battery in the remote control may have run out.  
(Page 16)  
(Page 24 of Vol. 1)  
not work.  
If the remote control fails to work even if it is operated close  
to the remote control sensor of the camera-recorder, it  
means that the battery has run out. Replace it with new one.  
• Make sure the remote control setting is the same for the  
remote control unit and the camera-recorder.  
(Page 24 of Vol. 1)  
If the REMOTE setting is different on the remote control and  
the camera-recorder, the remote control will not work.  
There is a rattling sound • There are some parts of the camera-recorder that make  
when the camera-  
recorder is tilted back  
and forth.  
a rattling sound in the PB/THUMBNAIL mode or when the  
POWER/MODE switch is OFF. This is normal.  
A clicking sound is  
heard when the power  
is turned on or when  
the PB/THUMBNAIL  
mode is switched to the  
CAMERA mode.  
• This initialization operation is performed when the camera-  
recorder starts up.  
It occurs due to the construction of the camera-recorder and  
is not indicative of any trouble.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updating the firmware incorporated into the unit  
Checking the current version of the firmware using the unit and performing the update  
Check firmware version of the camera-recorder in the DIAGNOSTIC screen. Then access the site listed in  
the NOTE below to check the most recent firmware information and download any firmware you require.  
The update is completed by loading the downloaded file onto the unit via an SD memory card.  
For details on updating, visit the support desk at the following website.  
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/  
Be sure to use a compatible SD memory card. The unit is compatible with SD memory cards  
based on the SD and SDHC standards. Also, be sure to format the memory card using the unit  
before use.  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cleaning  
Eye cup holder  
When cleaning, do not use benzene or thinner.  
• Using benzine or paint thinners may deform the  
camera-recorder and/or cause the surface finish  
to peel off.  
Eye cup  
• Before proceeding with maintenance, remove the  
battery or disconnect the AC cord from the power  
outlet.  
• Use a soft, clean cloth to wipe the camera-  
recorder. To remove stubborn dirt, wipe the  
camera-recorder with a cloth moistened with  
kitchen detergent that has been diluted with water  
and then use a dry cloth to take up the remaining  
moisture.  
Projection  
Cleaning the Viewfinder  
• If there is dust inside the view finder, remove the  
eye cup holder and get rid of the dust.  
• The interior of the eye cup holder is specially  
finished, so do not ever wipe it. If there is dust on  
it, blow it off with an air blower.  
• Remove the eye cup holder with the eye cup  
attached by rotating it counterclockwise. (It will  
be tightly screwed on.) When you do this, tilt the  
view finder slightly upward.  
To amount the eye cup holder, align the ridges  
and grooves of the eye cup holder and camera-  
recorder, and turn clockwise until the holder clicks  
into place.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storage precautions  
Before storing the camera-recorder, remove the  
battery.  
P2 cards  
• After ejecting a P2 card from the unit, be  
absolutely sure to attach its special cap to keep  
sand and dust away from the connector area.  
Stow the P2 cards in their own cases when  
storing them or carrying them around.  
• Do not leave P2 cards in areas where corrosive  
gases, etc. are present.  
Store all of these items in a place with low humidity  
and relatively constant temperature.  
[Recommended temperature range: 15 °C to 25 °C  
(59 °F to 77 °F)]  
[Recommended relative humidity: 40 % to 60 %]  
Video camera-recorder  
• Wrap the video camera-recorder in a soft cloth to  
keep the dust off.  
SD memory cards  
• After ejecting an SD memory card from the unit,  
be absolutely sure to stow it in its own case.  
• Do not leave SD memory cards in areas where  
corrosive gases, etc. are present.  
• Do not leave the cards inside vehicles, in places  
exposed to direct sunlight or in other places  
where the temperature is high.  
• Do not leave the cards where the humidity level  
is high or where there are high concentrations of  
dust.  
Battery  
• The battery life is shortened in places with  
extreme temperatures.  
• Storing the battery in a location with oily vapors  
or high dust concentrations may corrode the  
terminals or cause other damage, leading to  
malfunction.  
Keep metal objects (such as necklaces  
and hair pins) away from the terminals.  
Shortcircuiting may occur across the  
terminals, causing the battery to heat up, and  
you may seriously burn yourself if you touch  
the battery in this state.  
• Discharge the battery before storing it. When  
storing it for an extended time, charge it at least  
once a year, use up its charge in the camera-  
recorder, and then store it again.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How to handle data recorded on P2 cards  
The P2 card is a semiconductor memory card that is used as the recording medium in the professional  
video production and broadcasting devices that make up the DVCPRO P2 Series.  
Since data recorded in the DVCPRO P2 format or AVC-  
Device:\  
Intra are in a file format, they have excellent compatibility  
CONTENTS  
with PCs. The file structure is a unique format, which in  
addition to video and audio data in MXF files contains  
various other important information items. The folder  
structure links the data as shown on the right.  
AUDIO  
CLIP  
ICON  
PROXY  
VIDEO  
VOICE  
Changing or deleting just one information component  
could make it impossible to recognize the data as P2  
data or use the card in a P2 device  
LASTCLIP.TXT*  
All these folders are required.  
* This is the file in which the information  
on the final clip that was recorded with  
the P2 device is written.  
When transferring data from a P2 card to a PC, or when rewriting data saved on a PC to a P2 card, to  
prevent data loss be sure to use the special P2 Viewer software. Download it from the following website.  
You can also visit the support desk at the following website for details on the system requirements of P2  
Viewer.  
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/  
When using regular IT tools such as Microsoft Windows Explorer or Apple Finder to transfer data to a  
PC, follow the instructions below.  
However, be sure to use the P2 Viewer when returning data to a P2 card.  
• Transfer the corresponding CONTENTS folder and LASTCLIP.TXT file together as a set.  
• Do not transfer individual files from the CONTENTS folder.  
• When copying, copy the LASTCLIP.TXT file at the same time as the CONTENTS folder.  
• When transferring multiple P2 cards to a PC, create a folder for each P2 card to prevent clips with the  
same name from being overwritten.  
• Do not delete data from the P2 card.  
• Before using a P2 card, be sure to format it with a P2 device.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checkpoints for using memory cards  
<Cautions in using SD memory cards>  
Use the unit by inserting an SD memory card that is compliant with the SD standard or the SDHC  
standard.  
MMC (MultiMediaCards) cannot be used. (Bear in mind that taking pictures may no longer be  
possible if you do use them.)  
If you intend to use miniSD/microSD cards in camera-recorder, always install the adaptor  
specially designed for miniSD/microSD cards. (The unit will not work properly if only the miniSD/  
microSD card adaptor is installed. Make sure that the card has been installed in the adaptor  
before using it.)  
Use of Panasonic’s SD memory cards and miniSD/microSD cards is recommended. Be sure to  
format cards using camera-recorder.  
Any SD memory card with the following capacities (8 MB to 2 GB) and any 32 GB SDHC memory  
card can be used with the unit.  
For the latest information not available in the operating Instructions, visit the P2 Support Desk at  
the following Web sites.  
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/  
Cards you can use  
Cards you cannot use  
SD memory cards (including miniSD cards)  
SDHC memory cards (including miniSDHC cards)  
All memory cards except the  
ones pictured on the left  
MultiMediaCard  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Information on software for this product  
1. Included with this product is software licensed under the GNU General Public License (GPL) and  
GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), and users are hereby informed that they have the right  
to obtain, change and redistribute the source codes of this software.  
To obtain the source codes, go to the following home page:  
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/  
The manufacturer asks users to refrain from directing inquiries concerning the source codes they  
have obtained and other details to its representatives.  
2. Included with this product is software which is licensed under MIT-License.  
Details on the above software can be found on the installation CD provided with the unit. Refer to the  
folder called “LDOC”.  
(Details are given in the original (English language) text.)  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording format list  
REC FORMAT  
Codec Frame mode  
Shooting/recording frame mode  
VFR OFF VFR ON  
SYSTEM  
MODE  
60i  
60i  
1P to 30P*1 (Records as 60i)  
AVC-I100  
AVC-I50  
30PN  
24PN  
30P (30PN native recording)  
24P (24PN native recording)  
CAMERA MODE: 60i  
1P to 30P*1 (30PN native recording)  
1P to 30P*1 (24PN native recording)  
1P to 30P*1 (Records as 60i)  
1080-59.94i  
CAMERA MODE:  
DVCPROHD 60i  
30P (2:2 Over60i recording)  
24P (2:3 Over60i recording)  
24PA (2:3:3:2 Over60i recording)  
50i  
50i  
1P to 25P*2 (Records as 50i)  
1P to 25P*2 (25PN Native recording)  
1P to 25P*2 (Records as 50i)  
AVC-I100  
AVC-I50  
25PN  
25P (25PN native recording)  
CAMERA MODE: 50i  
1080-50i  
DVCPROHD 50i  
CAMERA MODE:  
25P (2:2 Over50i recording)  
60P  
60P  
1P to 60P*3 (Records as 60P)  
AVC-I100  
AVC-I50  
30PN  
30P (30PN native recording)  
24P (24PN native recording)  
60P  
1P to 60P*3 (30PN Native recording)  
1P to 60P*3 (24PN Native recording)  
1P to 60P*3 (Over60P recording)  
1P to 60P*3 (30PN Native recording)  
1P to 60P*3 (24PN Native recording)  
1P to 50P*4 (Records as 50P)  
24PN  
60P  
720-59.94P  
DVCPROHD 30PN  
24PN  
30P (30PN native recording)  
24P (24PN native recording)  
50P  
50P  
AVC-I100  
AVC-I50  
25PN  
25P (25PN native recording)  
50P  
1P to 50P*4 (25PN Native recording)  
1P to 50P*4 (Over50P recording)  
1P to 50P*4 (25PN Native recording)  
720-50P  
50P  
DVCPROHD  
25PN  
25P (25PN native recording)  
CAMERA MODE:  
DVCPRO50  
60i  
480-59.94i  
576-50i  
DVCPRO  
DV  
60i  
30P (2:2 Over60i recordin)  
24P (2:3 Over60i recording)  
24PA (2:3:3:2 Over60i recording)  
DVCPRO50  
DVCPRO  
DV  
CAMERA MODE:  
50i  
25P (2:2 Over50i recording)  
50i  
*1: Settable frame numbers are 1, 2, 4, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 30P.  
*2: Settable frame numbers are 1, 2, 4, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25P.  
*3: Settable frame numbers are 1, 2, 4, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36, 40,  
44, 48, 54, 60P.  
*4: Settable frame numbers are 1, 2, 4, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 30, 32, 34, 37,  
42, 45, 48, 50P.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Numeric  
Cine-like gamma....................................... 23  
Clip  
MENU 25M REC CH SEL.................................. 143  
MENU 1394 AUDIO OUT................................... 144  
MENU 1394 CMD SEL....................................... 151  
MENU 1394 CONFIG......................................... 154  
1394 connection ..................................... 106  
MENU 1394 CONTROL..................................... 151  
MENU 1394 STATUS......................................... 154  
Copying............................................... 86  
Deleting............................................... 84  
Meta data ............................................ 87  
Playing back........................................ 79  
Property............................................... 93  
Reconnection ...................................... 85  
Restoring............................................. 85  
MENU CLOCK SETTING................................... 151  
Color bars................................................. 40  
MENU COLOR TEMP Ach................................. 133  
MENU COLOR TEMP Bch................................. 133  
Control of external device....................... 106  
Counter..................................................... 61  
A
AC adaptor  
Installation............................. 21 of Vol. 1  
Removal................................ 21 of Vol. 1  
Using..................................... 21 of Vol. 1  
MENU ACCESS LED......................................... 151  
Adjusting the volume  
Adjusting the recording level............... 54  
Volume of the sound ......................... 100  
While shooting..................................... 40  
MENU AF........................................................... 140  
MENU AGC........................................................ 140  
MENU A.IRIS ..................................................... 140  
MENU A. IRIS LEVEL........................................ 133  
MENU ASPECT CONV...................................... 137  
ATW.......................................................... 33  
MENU ATW............................................... 138, 140  
Audio equipment....................................... 53  
Audio input................................................ 52  
Audio level meter magnification................ 55  
MENU AUDIO OUT............................................ 144  
MENU AUDIO SETUP screen............................ 143  
Auto focus................................................. 28  
MENU AUTO LEVEL CH3 ................................. 143  
MENU AUTO LEVEL CH4 ................................. 143  
MENU AUTO SW screen ................................... 140  
Auto tracking white balance...................... 33  
D
Date and time of shooting....................... 100  
MENU DATE/TIME............................................. 148  
MENU DETAIL CORING.................................... 133  
MENU DETAIL LEVEL ....................................... 132  
MENU DIAGNOSTIC screen ............................. 153  
Diopter adjustment ..................................... 6  
MENU DISPLAY SETUP screen........................ 147  
MENU DOWNCON MODE ................................ 145  
MENU DRS........................................................ 133  
MENU DRS EFFECT......................................... 133  
DVCPRO/DV connector ......................... 105  
E
Errors...................................................... 126  
MENU EVF B. LIGHT......................................... 147  
MENU EVF COLOR........................................... 147  
MENU EVF MODE............................................. 147  
MENU EVF PEAK FREQ................................... 147  
MENU EVF PEAK LEVEL.................................. 147  
MENU EVF SETTING........................................ 147  
External microphone........................ 53, 101  
Eye cup....................................... 23 of Vol. 1  
B
Battery  
Installation............................. 21 of Vol. 1  
Removal................................ 21 of Vol. 1  
Using..................................... 21 of Vol. 1  
Black balance ........................................... 34  
Built-in battery............................. 27 of Vol. 1  
Built-in microphone................................... 52  
F
Fast-forward ............................................. 74  
FBC .......................................................... 38  
Firmware................................................. 158  
Flash Band Compensation ....................... 38  
Focus assist.............................................. 29  
Focus bar.................................................. 29  
MENU FOCUS BAR........................................... 148  
MENU FRAME RATE......................................... 132  
C
MENU CAMERA MODE..................................... 136  
MENU CARD&BATTERY................................... 149  
MENU CARD FUNCTIONS screen.................... 150  
Center marker........................................... 36  
Check recording function.......................... 12  
MENU CHROMA LEVEL.................................... 133  
MENU CHROMA PHASE................................... 133  
G
Gain.......................................................... 30  
MENU GAMMA.................................................. 133  
GENLOCK................................................ 69  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index (continued)  
N
MENU GL PHASE.............................................. 152  
MENU NAME EDIT............................................ 134  
Native recording ....................................... 20  
Native VFR recording ............................... 21  
H
MENU HANDLE ZOOM ..................................... 138  
Headphones ........................................... 101  
MENU HIGH GAIN............................................. 138  
MENU H PHASE................................................ 152  
O
ONE CLIP REC ........................................ 47  
MENU ONE CLIP REC ...................................... 142  
One-clip recording .................................... 47  
ONE SHOT REC ...................................... 45  
One-shot recording................................... 45  
MENU ONE SHOT TIME ................................... 141  
MENU OPERATION........................................... 153  
MENU OPTION MENU screen .......................... 154  
MENU OTHER DISPLAY ................................... 149  
MENU OTHER FUNCTIONS screen ................. 151  
MENU OUTPUT SEL screen ............................. 145  
Overcranking effects................................. 26  
I
INTERVAL REC........................................ 44  
Interval recording...................................... 44  
MENU INTERVAL TIME..................................... 141  
MENU INT MIC .................................................. 144  
IRIS button................................................ 30  
IRIS ring.................................................... 30  
K
MENU KNEE...................................................... 134  
L
P
LAST CLIP DELETE................................. 42  
MENU LCD BACKLIGHT................................... 148  
LCD monitor ............................................... 7  
MENU LCD SETTING........................................ 148  
Lens hood  
P2 card  
Formatting.................................... 13, 91  
Insert ................................................... 10  
Protecting............................................ 12  
Recorded data................................... 161  
Recording times .................................. 14  
Remove............................................... 15  
Splitting ............................................... 14  
Status display.................................... 131  
Writing data back .............................. 116  
P2 card access lamps .............................. 12  
MENU P2CARD REMAIN.................................. 149  
MENU P.A.P FILTER.......................................... 154  
PB/THUMBNAIL mode ...................... 13, 74  
MENU PC MODE SELECT................................ 137  
Phantom microphone ............................... 53  
Play........................................................... 74  
MENU PRE REC.................................................. 44  
MENU PREREC MODE..................................... 141  
Pre-recording............................................ 44  
Progressive mode..................................... 20  
Property.................................................... 93  
Pull-down recording.................................. 20  
Attaching ............................... 22 of Vol. 1  
Detaching.............................. 22 of Vol. 1  
MENU LEVEL METER....................................... 148  
MENU LIMITER CH1 ......................................... 143  
MENU LIMITER CH2 ......................................... 143  
MENU LIMITER CH3 ......................................... 143  
MENU LIMITER CH4 ......................................... 143  
MENU LOAD/SAVE/INIT.................................... 132  
LOOP REC ............................................... 46  
Loop recording.......................................... 46  
MENU LOW GAIN.............................................. 138  
M
MAIN MENU............................... 30 of Vol. 1  
Manual focusing ....................................... 28  
MENU MARKER ................................................ 147  
MENU MASTER PED ........................................ 133  
MENU MATRIX .................................................. 134  
MENU MENU BACK .......................................... 149  
MENU MENU INIT ............................................. 152  
Meta data  
R
REC CHECK ............................................ 12  
MENU REC COUNTER ..................................... 149  
MENU REC FORMAT ........................................ 135  
MENU REC FUNCTION .................................... 141  
Recording format list............................... 164  
Recording mode ....................................... 43  
MENU RECORDING SETUP screen................. 141  
Recording time codes............................... 71  
Recording user bits................................... 71  
Item ..................................................... 88  
Upload................................................. 87  
MENU MF ASSIST............................................. 139  
MENU MIC GAIN1 ............................................. 144  
MENU MIC GAIN2 ............................................. 144  
MENU MID GAIN ............................................... 138  
MENU MODE CHECK ....................................... 131  
MENU MODEL NAME........................................ 153  
Monitor.................................................... 104  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T
MENU REC SIGNAL.......................................... 135  
Remaining battery charge ...................... 124  
MENU REMOTE ................................................ 151  
Rewind...................................................... 74  
Tally lamp.................................................... 9  
MENU TALLY LAMP........................................... 151  
MENU TCG........................................................ 141  
MENU TC IN/OUT SEL...................................... 145  
MENU TC MODE............................................... 141  
MENU TC OUT .................................................. 146  
MENU TC PRESET............................................ 142  
MENU TC VIDEO SYNC.................................... 146  
MENU TEST TONE............................................ 143  
Text memo................................................ 42  
Thumbnail  
S
MENU SAFETY ZONE....................................... 148  
Safety zone marker .................................. 36  
MENU SCAN REVERSE ................................... 136  
Scene file.................................................. 56  
MENU SCENE FILE........................................... 150  
Scene file data.......................................... 57  
MENU SCENE FILE screen............................... 132  
MENU SD CARD FORMAT................................ 150  
MENU SDI EDH................................................. 145  
MENU SDI & HDMI CHAR................................. 145  
MENU SDI & HDMI SELECT............................. 145  
MENU SDI METADATA...................................... 145  
MENU SDI OUT................................................. 145  
SD memory card..................................... 162  
Formatting........................................... 92  
Changing............................................. 81  
Selecting ............................................. 79  
Switching............................................. 80  
Thumbnail screen................................ 77  
THUMBNAIL............................................. 76  
Time code.......................................... 61, 66  
Time code display................................... 121  
Time data.................................................. 61  
MENU TIME STAMP.......................................... 142  
Time zone............................................... 152  
MENU TIME ZONE............................................ 152  
Tripod.......................................... 14 of Vol. 1  
TV........................................................... 104  
Installation........................................... 16  
Removal.............................................. 16  
Status display...................................... 98  
Using................................................... 16  
MENU SEEK SELECT....................................... 152  
Self-portrait shooting ................................ 35  
MENU SELF SHOOT......................................... 148  
MENU SERIAL NO............................................. 153  
MENU SETUP.................................................... 137  
Setup menu  
U
MENU UB MODE............................................... 142  
MENU UB PRESET ........................................... 142  
Undercranking effects............................... 25  
Updating ................................................. 158  
USB  
Initializing .............................. 29 of Vol. 1  
List..................................................... 132  
Structure................................ 30 of Vol. 1  
Using..................................... 28 of Vol. 1  
Device mode ..................................... 109  
HOST mode .......................................111  
MENU USER1.................................................... 139  
MENU USER2.................................................... 139  
MENU USER3.................................................... 139  
MENU USER4.................................................... 139  
User bits ................................................... 62  
USER button............................................. 39  
USER CLIP NAME ................................... 90  
MENU USER FILE.................................... 150, 151  
MENU USER MAIN............................................ 139  
Using the setup menus............... 28 of Vol. 1  
Shooting ............................................ 10, 28  
Shot mark .......................................... 41, 82  
Shoulder strap ............................ 22 of Vol. 1  
SHUTTER................................................. 49  
Shutter speed ........................................... 49  
MENU SKIN TONE DTL..................................... 134  
Specifications ............................. 32 of Vol. 1  
Standard recording................................... 20  
Standard VFR recording........................... 22  
MENU START DELAY........................................ 141  
MENU START TEXT MEMO.............................. 142  
MENU SUPER GAIN ......................................... 138  
MENU SW MODE screen .................................. 138  
SYNCHRO SCAN..................................... 50  
MENU SYNCHRO SCAN................................... 132  
MENU SYNC SCAN TYPE ................................ 132  
MENU SYSTEM MODE..................................... 135  
MENU SYSTEM SETUP screen ........................ 135  
V
Variable Frame Rate................................. 21  
MENU V DETAIL FREQ..................................... 134  
MENU V DETAIL LEVEL.................................... 132  
MENU VERSION ............................................... 153  
VFR .......................................................... 21  
MENU VFR ........................................................ 132  
MENU VIDEO OUT CHAR................................. 145  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index (continued)  
MENU VIDEO OUT ZEBRA............................... 145  
Viewfinder  
Status indication................................ 120  
Using..................................................... 6  
W
Warnings................................................. 126  
Waveform monitor function....................... 40  
MENU W.BAL.PRESET ..................................... 138  
MENU WFM....................................................... 139  
White balance  
Adjusting ............................................. 32  
Write-protect switch .................................. 12  
Z
MENU ZEBRA1 DETECT .................................. 147  
MENU ZEBRA2.................................................. 147  
MENU ZEBRA2 DETECT .................................. 147  
Zebra pattern............................................ 35  
Zoom ........................................................ 18  
MENU ZOOM·FOCUS ....................................... 149  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memo  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2011  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Multi Tech Systems Modem MT9234ZBA User Manual
NetComm Network Router AM5065 User Manual
Nintendo Video Games 69178A User Manual
NuTone Home Security System VSC4R User Manual
Olivetti Printer PG L2028 User Manual
Oregon Scientific Air Cleaner WS909 User Manual
Panasonic Air Conditioner CS KC12NKH 3 User Manual
Panasonic Garage Door Opener CZ RD515U User Manual
Panasonic Smoke Alarm 2318 User Manual
Partner Tech Tablet EM200PR User Manual